WO2019161807A1 - 控制信令的发送、控制信令的接收以及信息的确定方法及装置 - Google Patents

控制信令的发送、控制信令的接收以及信息的确定方法及装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019161807A1
WO2019161807A1 PCT/CN2019/076207 CN2019076207W WO2019161807A1 WO 2019161807 A1 WO2019161807 A1 WO 2019161807A1 CN 2019076207 W CN2019076207 W CN 2019076207W WO 2019161807 A1 WO2019161807 A1 WO 2019161807A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
signal
parameter
control signaling
information
predetermined threshold
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/076207
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
张淑娟
李儒岳
高波
蒋创新
张楠
吴昊
鲁照华
Original Assignee
中兴通讯股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 中兴通讯股份有限公司 filed Critical 中兴通讯股份有限公司
Priority to EP19757789.3A priority Critical patent/EP3761549A4/en
Priority to KR1020207027866A priority patent/KR20200125678A/ko
Priority to CA3092288A priority patent/CA3092288A1/en
Priority to JP2020544797A priority patent/JP7374913B2/ja
Priority to EP23194567.6A priority patent/EP4277176A3/en
Publication of WO2019161807A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019161807A1/zh
Priority to US17/002,474 priority patent/US11564218B2/en
Priority to US18/147,039 priority patent/US12010707B2/en
Priority to JP2023183408A priority patent/JP2024010104A/ja

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091—Signaling for the administration of the divided path
    • H04L5/0094—Indication of how sub-channels of the path are allocated
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/0001—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff
    • H04L1/0023—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff characterised by the signalling
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0014—Three-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0023—Time-frequency-space
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H04L5/005—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver of common pilots, i.e. pilots destined for multiple users or terminals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H04L5/0051—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver of dedicated pilots, i.e. pilots destined for a single user or terminal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053—Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0078—Timing of allocation
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446—Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/046—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource the resource being in the space domain, e.g. beams
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/50—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources
    • H04W72/56—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on priority criteria
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0686—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0695—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission using beam selection
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0003—Two-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0005—Time-frequency
    • H04L5/0007—Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A), DMT
    • H04L5/001—Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A), DMT the frequencies being arranged in component carriers

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communications, for example, to a method and apparatus for determining transmission and reception of control signaling and information.
  • high-frequency communication provides strong support for high-speed and large-bandwidth communication in the future, but a core problem of high-frequency communication is that the path loss is relatively large.
  • the antenna size is relatively small, multiple antennas can be used to form a beam to resist path loss.
  • the downlink signal beam can be notified through physical layer dynamic control signaling.
  • the terminal cannot pass through the physical layer.
  • the information notified by the dynamic control signaling acquires the receive beam of the downlink signal.
  • the above solution may have the following two situations.
  • the first case when the interval between the physical layer dynamic control signaling and the downlink signal is less than a predetermined threshold, the bit field of the notification beam in the physical layer dynamic control signaling is not fully utilized.
  • the second case since the downlink signal needs to be buffered before the physical layer dynamic control signaling is decoded, the actual downlink signal base station may not be scheduled. If the terminal needs to dynamically schedule the downlink downlink signal according to the CORESET buffer of the latest CORESETID, At the location where the potential downlink signals are located, there may be a previously scheduled signal. When the previously scheduled downlink signal and the beam terminal of the potential downlink signal cannot be simultaneously played, the base station and the terminal are required to agree on the behavior, thereby ensuring the validity of the communication.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a method and a device for determining transmission, reception, and information of control signaling, to overcome the physical layer dynamics when the interval between the physical layer dynamic control signaling and the downlink signal is less than a predetermined threshold in the related art.
  • the bit field of the notification beam is not fully utilized, and the defect caused by low resource utilization and the location of the potential downlink signal may still exist in the previously scheduled signal, when the previously scheduled downlink signal and the beam terminal of the potential downlink signal A defect that cannot be guaranteed at the same time when the communication cannot be guaranteed.
  • a method for transmitting control signaling including: determining second information according to first information; wherein the second information includes at least one of: a notification in a first control signaling a corresponding mapping table between the number of bits N used by the first transmission parameter, the index value referenced by the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling, and the value of the first transmission parameter, and predetermined in the first control signaling And indicating the type of the first transmission parameter that is notified by the domain, and the location information of the first control signaling used to notify the first transmission parameter; the first information includes: the first control signaling and the first signal The relationship between the transmission time interval and the predetermined threshold K, N, K are non-negative integers; the first control signaling is transmitted.
  • the first control signaling is sent according to the determined second information.
  • a method for determining information includes: determining second information according to first information; wherein the second information includes at least one of: a quasi co-location QCL of the first signal a method of transmitting a first signal at a time domain position where the second signal is located; a receiving mode of the first signal at a time domain position where the second signal is located; wherein the first information includes at least one of the following information: specific control Whether the second signal exists in a predetermined time window after the resource set CORESET, the relationship between the interval between the first signal and the specific CORESET and the predetermined threshold X1, and the time interval between the second signal and the specific CORESET a relationship between a predetermined interval X1, a time interval between the first signal and the first control signaling and a predetermined threshold X1, and a time interval between the second signal and the second control signaling The relationship between the first spatial reception parameter corresponding to the first signal and the second spatial reception parameter corresponding to the second signal, wherein X1 and X2 are
  • a method for receiving control signaling including: determining second information according to first information; receiving first control signaling according to the second information; wherein, the second The information includes at least one of the following: a number N of bits used to notify the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling, an index value referenced by the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling, and a value of the first transmission parameter Corresponding mapping table, a type of the first transmission parameter notified by the predetermined indication field in the first control signaling, and location information of the bit used to notify the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling; the first information
  • the method includes: a relationship between a transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and a predetermined threshold K, where N and K are non-negative integers.
  • a method for determining a quasi co-located reference signal including at least one of the following:
  • the quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal is determined according to at least one of the signaling information and the predetermined rule; and the space between the N signals at the same time
  • the receiving parameters satisfy the quasi co-location relationship, where N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • a control device which is applied to a first communication node, and includes: a first determining module, configured to determine second information according to the first information; wherein The second information includes at least one of the following: a number N of bits used in the first control signaling to notify the first transmission parameter, an index value referenced by the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling, and a reference to the first transmission parameter.
  • the first control signaling is sent according to the determined second information.
  • an apparatus for determining information, applied to a first communication node comprising: a second determining module, configured to determine second information according to the first information; wherein the second information And including at least one of the following: a quasi-co-located QCL parameter of the first signal; a manner of transmitting the first signal in a time domain position where the second signal is located; and a receiving manner of the first signal in a time domain position where the second signal is located;
  • the first information includes at least one of the following: a presence or absence of the second signal in a predetermined time window after a specific control resource set CORESET, a relationship between an interval between the first signal and a specific CORESET and a predetermined threshold X1 a relationship between a time interval between the second signal and a specific CORESET and a predetermined threshold X2, a relationship between a time interval between the first signal and the first control signaling and a predetermined threshold X1, a relationship between a time interval between the second signal and
  • a receiving apparatus for controlling signaling is applied to a second communications node, including: a third determining module: determining second information according to the first information; and receiving a module: according to the Receiving, by the second information, the first control signaling, where the second information is information determined according to the first information, where the second information includes at least one of: notifying the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling The number of bits used, the corresponding mapping table between the index value referenced by the first transmission parameter and the value of the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling, and the notification field notified by the predetermined indication field in the first control signaling The type of the first transmission parameter, the location information of the first control signaling used to notify the first transmission parameter; the first information includes: a transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal N and K are non-negative integers in relation to a predetermined threshold K.
  • a storage medium having stored therein a computer program, wherein the computer program is configured to execute the steps of any one of the method embodiments described above.
  • an electronic device comprising a memory and a processor, wherein the memory stores a computer program, the processor being configured to run the computer program to perform any of the above The steps in the method embodiments.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting control signaling according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 1a is a schematic diagram of obtaining a Spatial Rx parameter parameter of PDSCH2 according to a Spatial Rx parameter parameter of PDSCH1 according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 1b is a schematic diagram of obtaining a Spatial Rx parameter parameter of a PDSCH according to a Spatial Rx parameter parameter of a CSI-RS according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 1c is a schematic diagram of obtaining a Spatial Rx parameter parameter of a PDSCH according to a Spatial Rx parameter parameter of a CORESET of a lowest CORESETID in a time domain symbol closest to a PDSCH according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 1d is a schematic diagram 1 showing a difference between a receive beam corresponding to a Spatial Rx parameter parameter of a PDSCH and a receive beam corresponding to a Spatial Rx parameter of a CORESET in the same time domain symbol according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 1e is a schematic diagram 2 of a received beam corresponding to a Spatial Rx parameter parameter of a PDSCH and a received beam corresponding to a Spatial Rx parameter of a CORESET in the same time domain symbol according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 1f is a schematic diagram 3 of a receiving beam corresponding to a Spatial Rx parameter parameter of a PDSCH and a receiving beam corresponding to a Spatial Rx parameter of a CORESET in the same time domain symbol according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram of determining, according to a relationship between a distance between a periodic Cx-RS and a CORESET having a lowest CORESETID closest to a period CSI-RS and a distance period CSI-RS, according to a predetermined threshold value, according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 3 is a distance between a priority of at least a Spatial Rx parameter parameter of a periodic CSI-RS and a PDSCH according to an embodiment of the present application, and a predetermined threshold according to a period between a periodic CSI-RS and a CORESET having a lowest CORESETID closest to a distance period CSI-RS.
  • 4a is a schematic diagram 1 of a method for acquiring a Spatial Rx parameter of a PDSCH in each slot when a PDSCH occupies multiple slots according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 4b is a second schematic diagram of a method for acquiring a Spatial Rx parameter of a PDSCH in each slot when a PDSCH occupies multiple slots according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 4c is a third schematic diagram of a method for acquiring a Spatial Rx parameter parameter of a PDSCH in each slot when a PDSCH occupies multiple slots according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram 4 of a method for acquiring a Spatial Rx parameter of a PDSCH in each slot when a PDSCH occupies multiple slots according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 4 e is a schematic diagram 5 of a method for acquiring a Spatial Rx parameter parameter of a PDSCH in each slot when a PDSCH occupies multiple slots according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 4f is a schematic diagram 6 of a method for acquiring a Spatial Rx parameter parameter of a PDSCH in each slot when a PDSCH occupies multiple slots according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of corresponding time domain locations corresponding to multiple tables of index values and transmission parameter values according to an embodiment of the present application
  • 6a is a schematic diagram of QCL between two PDSCHs of different CCs according to an embodiment of the present application
  • 6b is a schematic diagram of QCL between PDSCH and CORESET of different CCs according to an embodiment of the present application
  • 6c is a schematic diagram of QCL between two CORESETs of different CCs according to an embodiment of the present application
  • 6d is a schematic diagram of QCL between PDSCH and CSI-RS of different CCs according to an embodiment of the present application
  • 7a is a schematic diagram of a QCL between two PDSCHs belonging to one CC according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 7b is a schematic diagram of a QCL between a PDSCH and a CORESET belonging to one CC according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 7c is a schematic diagram of QCL between two CORESETs belonging to one CC according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 7d is a schematic diagram of a QCL between a PDSCH and a CSI-RS belonging to one CC according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 7e is a schematic diagram of QCL between two CSI-RSs belonging to one CC according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8a is a schematic diagram of a QCL parameter of a CORESET and whether a terminal detects a beam recovery request signal according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 8b is a first schematic diagram 1 of scheduling DCI of aperiodic measurement reference signal after aperiodic measurement reference signal according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 8c is a second schematic diagram of scheduling DCI of aperiodic measurement reference signal after aperiodic measurement reference signal according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a method for receiving control signaling according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining information according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic block diagram showing a structure of a transmitting apparatus for controlling signaling according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic block diagram showing a structure of a receiving apparatus for control signaling according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic block diagram showing the structure of an apparatus for determining information according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a quasi-co-location reference signal according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic block diagram showing the structure of a determining apparatus for a quasi-co-located reference signal according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a method for transmitting control signaling according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1, the process includes the following steps S102 and S104.
  • step S102 second information is determined based on the first information.
  • the second information includes at least one of the following: a number N of bits used in the first control signaling to notify the first transmission parameter, an index value referenced by the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling, and the first transmission. a corresponding mapping table between the values of the parameters, a type of the first transmission parameter notified by the predetermined indication field in the first control signaling, and location information of the bit used to notify the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling;
  • the first information includes: a relationship between a transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and a predetermined threshold K, where N and K are non-negative integers.
  • step S104 the first control signaling is transmitted.
  • the first control signaling is sent according to the determined second information.
  • the second information is determined according to the first information, where the second information includes at least one of the following: a number N of bits used in the first control signaling to notify the first transmission parameter, and a first control signaling a mapping table between an index value referenced by a transmission parameter and a value of the first transmission parameter, a type of the first transmission parameter notified by the predetermined indication field in the first control signaling, and a notification in the first control signaling Position information of the bit used by the first transmission parameter; the first information includes: a relationship between a transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and a predetermined threshold K, where N and K are non-negative integers Sending the first control signaling.
  • the format of the control signaling is determined by the second information, and then the new control signaling is sent, which overcomes the physical layer dynamic when the interval between the physical layer dynamic control signaling and the downlink signal is less than a predetermined threshold in the related art.
  • the bit field of the notification beam in the control signaling does not fully utilize the defect of low resource utilization, and the technical effect of improving the utilization of the control signaling resource is achieved.
  • the execution body of the foregoing steps may be a base station or the like, but is not limited thereto.
  • step S102 and step S104 are interchangeable, that is, step S104 may be performed first, and then S102 is performed.
  • the value of the N when the relationship between the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is the first relationship, the value of the N includes N1; When the relationship between the transmission time interval between the signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is the second relationship, the value of the above N includes N2; wherein N1 and N2 are integers.
  • the relationship between the N1 and the N2 is at least one of the following: the N1 is greater than the N2; the difference between the N1 and the N2 is less than or equal to the number of bits occupied by the Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) field. The difference between the above N1 and the above N2 is less than or equal to the number of bits required to notify the second transmission parameter information.
  • TCI Transmission Configuration Indication
  • the corresponding mapping table when the relationship between the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is the first relationship, the corresponding mapping table is a first corresponding mapping table; When the relationship between the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is the second relationship, the corresponding mapping table is the second corresponding mapping table.
  • any one of the first corresponding mapping table, the second corresponding mapping table, the transmission parameter value set 1 and the transmission parameter value set 2 is determined by at least one of the following manners: mode one, sending The content included in the signaling information; the second method: the pre-agreed rules of the sending end and the receiving end; wherein the set of the transmission parameter values corresponds to the set of values of the first transmission parameter included in the first corresponding mapping table
  • the transmission parameter value set 2 corresponds to the value set of the first transmission parameter included in the second corresponding mapping table.
  • a downlink reference signal (Down link reference signal) of the associated spatial reception parameter Spatial Rx parameter in each state in the first corresponding mapping table when the type of the first transmission parameter is TCI, a downlink reference signal (Down link reference signal) of the associated spatial reception parameter Spatial Rx parameter in each state in the first corresponding mapping table.
  • the RS-constituted DL-RS set includes only one DL-RS; when the first transmission parameter type is TCI, the downlink reference signal DL- of the associated spatial reception parameter in each state in the first corresponding mapping table
  • the spatial reception parameters between the DL-RSs in the DL-RS set formed by the RS satisfy the quasi co-location (QCL) relationship.
  • QCL quasi co-location
  • the DL-RS in the DL-RS set formed by the downlink reference signal DL-RS of the associated spatial reception parameter in each state in the first corresponding mapping table can be first.
  • the communication node is simultaneously received; when the first transmission parameter type is TCI, the DL-RS set formed by the downlink reference signal DL-RS of the associated spatial reception parameter in each state in the first corresponding mapping table is an empty set;
  • the first communication node is a communication node that receives at least one of the first signal and the first control signaling.
  • the type of the first transmission parameter is one or more transmission parameter types except the TCI transmission parameter type included in the foregoing first control signaling; or the first transmission parameter type is TCI transmission. parameter.
  • the first transmission parameter satisfies at least one of the following: the first transmission parameter is a transmission parameter of the first signal; and the first transmission parameter is a transmission parameter of the second signal.
  • the first signal or the second signal includes at least one of a demodulation reference signal, a measurement reference signal, a control channel signal, and a data channel signal; the first control signaling is physical layer control. Signaling.
  • the first information further includes at least one of the following information: information included in the second control signaling; and a transmission configuration corresponding to the control resource set (CORESET) where the first control signaling is located Whether the transmission configuration indication (TCI-PresentInDCI) is enabled; the relationship between the carrier frequency of the first signal or the second signal and the predetermined threshold G; the supported frequency range capability fed back by the first communication node; Whether the preset threshold K is 0; whether there is at least one CORESET configured with a spatial receiving parameter in the CORESET that the first communication node needs to detect; and whether at least one of the CORESET sets associated with the first communication node that needs to detect the dedicated search space exists a CORESET configured with a spatial receiving parameter; whether the CORESET having the lowest control resource set identity (CORESETID) in the time unit closest to the first signal or the second signal is configured with a CORESET of a spatial receiving parameter; The first signal or the second Whether the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID among the nearest
  • the first control signaling includes at least one of the following signaling: physical layer control signaling, MAC-CE control signaling, and RRC control signaling; and the second control signaling includes at least one of the following signaling : physical layer control signaling, MAC-CE control signaling, and RRC control signaling.
  • the first indication signaling is notified by the predetermined indication field.
  • the type of the first transmission parameter is a first type of transmission parameter; when the relationship between the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is a second relationship, the second control signal.
  • the type of the first transmission parameter that is notified by the predetermined indication field is a second type of transmission parameter.
  • the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal is less than the predetermined threshold K
  • the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal is a predetermined threshold
  • the relationship between K is the first relationship, and the transmission between the first control signaling and the first signal when the transmission time interval between the control signaling and the first signal is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold K
  • the relationship between the time interval and the predetermined threshold K is the foregoing second relationship; or, when the transmission time interval between the control signaling and the first signal is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold K, the first control signaling and The relationship between the transmission time interval between the first signals and the predetermined threshold K is the first relationship, and the first control is performed when the transmission time interval between the control signaling and the first signal is greater than the predetermined threshold K
  • the relationship between the transmission time interval between the signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is the foregoing second relationship; or, in the above control signaling and the first signal When the transmission time interval is greater than or equal to the
  • a physical shared channel (PDSCH) beam can be notified by Down Control Information (DCI).
  • DCI Down Control Information
  • the terminal has not decoded yet.
  • the DCI needs the radio frequency reception buffer PDSCH, so the correlation NR specifies that when the interval between the DCI and the PDSCH is less than the predetermined threshold K, the QCL parameter of the DMRS of the PDSCH is obtained according to the QCL parameter corresponding to the lowest CORESETID in the latest slot (slot).
  • the QCL parameter of the DMRS of the PDSCH is acquired using the QCL information indicated in the DCI.
  • the interval between the DCI and the PDSCH is less than K, and the load of the PDCCH is the same as the load of the PDCCH when the interval between the DCI and the PDSCH is greater than or equal to K.
  • the 3-bit TCI notification field in the DCI (the TCI notification field is used to notify the QSCH parameter of the DMRS of the PDSCH) exists, but is not utilized, and the TCI notification domain is in the version of the relevant NR. Occupies 3 bits.
  • the 3-bit TCI notification field in the DCI may notify one or more transmission parameters (ie, the first transmission parameter) other than the TCI transmission parameter in the DCI, the relevant NR DCI
  • the transmission parameters in format1_1 are as shown in Table 1. As can be seen from Table 1, the interval between DCI and PDSCH can be determined by the information indicated in the transmission parameter indication field 5.
  • the first transmission parameter is a transmission parameter numbered as 14 in Table 1.
  • the resource indication field of the PUCCH may adopt the bit field numbered 14 in Table 1 and numbered 17 A total of 5 bits of the bit field indicates that one of the PUCCH resources is selected from the maximum of 32 PUCCH resources.
  • the PUCCH set is set0 according to the uplink control information (UCI) load, the above two may be used.
  • the bit field jointly indicates the index of the PUCCH resource in set0.
  • the PUCCH set is not set0 according to the UCI load, even if the interval is less than K, only the bit field numbered 14 in Table 1 is used to notify the PUCCH resource, not used.
  • the bit field numbered 14 in Table 1 and the bit field numbered 17 are jointly indicated, because the maximum number of PUCCH resources included in these sets is 8.
  • the resource of the PUCCH indicates that only one of the PUCCH resources is selected from the maximum of 4 PUCCH resources by using the indication field numbered 14 in Table 1.
  • the order of the indication fields in the DCI may continue to follow the order of Table 1, except that the indication field 14 indicates that the domain 17 together constitutes a PUCCH resource indication field.
  • the transmission parameter indication domain sequence as shown in Table 2 may be used at this time. The change of Table 2 compared to Table 1 is that the transmission parameter indication field 17 is cancelled, and the number of bits of the transmission parameter indication field 14 becomes 5 bits.
  • DCI when the transmission interval between DCI and PDSCH is less than a predetermined K value, DCI can be dynamically selected in 32 PUCCH resources, as shown in Table 3; when the transmission interval between DCI and PDSCH is greater than or equal to a predetermined K value. DCI can only be dynamically selected in four PUCCH resources, as shown in Table 4.
  • PUCCH resource selection parameter indication value in DCI PUCCH resources 0 PUCCH resource 1 1 PUCCH Resources 2 2 PUCCH Resources 3 3 PUCCH Resources 4
  • the four PUCCH resources in Table 4 are the same as the first four PUCCH resources in Table 3, so that the base station only needs to notify 32 PUCCH resources when notifying, of course, this embodiment It is not excluded that the PUCCH resources in Table 3 and the PUCCH resources in Table 4 may be different. In this way, when the base station uses the high layer signaling to notify, the base station notifies the PUCCH resources for Table 3 and Table 4, respectively.
  • the interval between the DCI and the PDSCH may be one of the following intervals:
  • the indication domain of the TCI is borrowed for the PUCCH resource indication.
  • the indication domain of the TCI is used for the rate mating indication field, and similarly, the high layer signaling needs to configure two sets of rate when configuring the rate mating information.
  • Mating parameters such as a set of parameters used to create a table similar to that described in Table 3, another set of parameters used to create a table similar to that described in Table 4, or a set of parameters, but all entries in the set of parameters
  • the agreed part of the entry (such as the first M entries, or the last M entries) is used for the establishment of similar table 4, except that the tables in Tables 3 and 4 should be index values.
  • the value and the rate mating information, and the number of states in the table 3 and the number of states in the table 4 are also changed.
  • the rate-match-PDSCH-resource-set in the upper layer configuration includes two resources (resource).
  • Transmission parameter indication field 17 joint reference ;
  • rate mating information 6 in total 2 (1) 2 state table, from Table 1, transmission parameter indication field 8 Instructions.
  • Rate mating information index value in DCI Rate mating information 0 High-level configuration rate mating information 1 1 High-level configuration of rate mating information 2 2 High-level configuration of rate mating information 3 3 High-level configuration of rate mating information 4 ... ... 15 High-level configuration of rate mating information 16
  • PUCCH resource selection parameter indication value in DCI PUCCH resources 0 High-level configuration rate mating information 1 1 High-level configuration of rate mating information 2
  • the TCI indication field can be used for any one or more of the 20 parameters other than the TCI transmission parameter in Table 1.
  • the first one of the three bits of the TCI indication field is used for the notification of the rate mating information, and the last two bits are used for the notification of the ZP-CSI-RS information.
  • the base station signaling indicates that when the interval between the DCI and the PDSCH is less than the predetermined threshold K, the first bit of the TCI indication field is used for notification of the rate mating information, and the second bit of the TCI indication field is used for the ZP-CSI-RS.
  • the notification of the information, or the base station signaling indicates that when the interval between the DCI and the PDSCH is less than the predetermined threshold K, 3 bits of the TCI domain are used for notification of the rate mating information; or the base station notifies by signaling, when DCI and PDSCH When the interval between them is less than the predetermined threshold K, the first 2 bits of the TCI field are used for the notification of the PDSCH frequency domain resource, and the last bit of the TCI field is used for the notification of the ZP-CSI-RS information.
  • the TCI indication field is used to indicate other types of transmission parameters except the TCI transmission parameter in Table 1, and may also be used to indicate that the table 1 does not have the a transmission parameter type, such as used to indicate CSI information (where CSI information is used to trigger at least one of aperiodic CSI-RS and aperiodic CSI reporting), such that when the interval between DCI and PDSCH is less than K, in DCI
  • the TCI indication field is used to indicate CSI trigger information.
  • the TCI indication field is used to indicate TCI information, and the CSI information cannot be indicated in the DCI.
  • At least one of the following information is determined: the transmission indicated by the specific indication domain of the physical layer dynamic control signaling Parameter type, whether the physical layer dynamic control signaling includes indication information indicating a specific transmission parameter type.
  • the specific indication domain of the physical layer dynamic control signaling is used. Indicates a first type of transmission parameter; when the relationship between the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is a relationship of two, the specific indication of the physical layer dynamic control signaling The field is used to indicate the second type of transmission parameters.
  • the physical layer dynamic control signaling when the relationship between the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is a relationship, the physical layer dynamic control signaling includes indicating a specific transmission parameter.
  • the relationship 1 is that the physical layer dynamic control signaling and the first signal transmission interval are less than a predetermined threshold, and the relationship is the physical layer dynamic control signaling and the first signal transmission interval. Greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold; or
  • the relationship 1 is that the physical layer dynamic control signaling and the first signal transmission interval are less than or equal to a predetermined threshold, and the relationship 2 is that the physical layer dynamic control signaling and the first signal transmission interval are greater than a predetermined threshold.
  • the transmission parameter may be a transmission parameter of the first signal or a transmission parameter of the second signal.
  • the indication field in the DCI of the number 17 in Table 1 is used to indicate the rate mating indication information
  • the indication field in the DCI numbered 17 in Table 1 is used to indicate the TCI information.
  • the indication field in the DCI numbered 17 in Table 1 is used to indicate CSI request information, between the DCI and the PDSCH.
  • the indication field in the DCI numbered 17 in Table 1 is used to indicate the TCI information (ie, the QCL parameter information of the DMRS of the PDSCH).
  • the DCI of the DL-Grant when the interval between the DCI and the PDSCH is less than K, the DCI of the DL-Grant includes the CSI request indication information, and when the interval between the DCI and the PDSCH is greater than or equal to K, the CSI request indication is not included in the DCI of the DL-Grant. information.
  • the number of candidate parameter values included in the value set of the first transmission parameter may vary according to the first relationship, such as when the interval between DCI and PDSCH is less than K
  • the value set of the first transmission parameter includes X1 values.
  • the value set of the first transmission parameter includes X2 values.
  • the mapping table in the DCI indicating that the index value referenced by the index value of the first transmission parameter and the first transmission value are in Table 1 (for example, as shown in Table 3)
  • the control mapping in the DCI indicates that the mapping table between the index value referenced by the index value of the first transmission parameter and the first transmission value is Table 2 (for example, Table 4) Show).
  • whether the TCI indication field exists in the DCI is also configured by a per CORESET (Control resource set), and the TCI indication field does not exist in the DCI in the configuration CORESET1, that is, the DCI in the CORESET1 does not include the number 17 in Table 1.
  • the transmission parameter indication field is configured to have a TCI indication field in the DCI in the CORESET2, that is, the DCI in the CORESET2 includes the transmission parameter indication field numbered 17 in Table 1, and it is agreed that the transmission interval between the DCI and the PDSCH is less than the agreed threshold (for example, In K), the TCI indicator field in the DCI is used to indicate the rate mating information, so the index mating information indicated in the DCI transmitted in the CORESET2 refers to the index value and the rate mating information, and there are two tables in Table 5 and Table 6, when When the interval between the DCI and the PDSCH is less than the predetermined threshold, referring to Table 5, when the interval between the DCI and the PDSCH is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold, referring to Table 6, the index value referenced by the rate mating information indicated in the DCI in the CORESET1 And rating information is also referred to Table 6.
  • the index value and rating information referred to in the rate mating information indicated in the DCI in CORESET1 refer to a table different from Table 6, for example, Table 6-2, that is, there are three tables referenced by the rate mating information at this time.
  • the base station notifies the rate mating information through the high layer signaling, it needs to notify the rate mating information for each table, or the upper layer notifies the information of Table 6 and Table 5 by one signaling, and notifies the information of Table 6-2 by another signaling. .
  • the table referred to by the index information of the indicated rate mating information in the DCI is Table 5. In other cases, the index information of the rate mating information indicated in the DCI is referred to.
  • the table is Table 6.
  • the table referred to by the index information of the indicated rate mating information in the DCI is Table 6, or the table referred to by the index information of the rate mating information indicated in the DCI is Table 6-2.
  • Y tables referred to by the rate mating information instructed in the DCI there are Y tables referred to by other transmission parameter types indicated in the DCI.
  • the second information is determined according to the first information, where the second information includes at least one of the following: the number N of bits used in the control signaling to notify the first transmission parameter, and the first transmission is notified in the control signaling. a mapping table between the index value referenced by the parameter information and the first transmission parameter value, a type of the first transmission parameter predetermined in the control signaling to indicate the indication of the domain, and a position of the control signaling to notify the bit used by the first transmission parameter information.
  • the first information includes: a relationship between a transmission time interval between the control signaling and the first signal and a predetermined threshold.
  • the first information further includes at least one of the following information one to ten.
  • Information one information included in the second control signaling, for example, the base station sends signaling information to the terminal, and the signaling information notifies at least one of the following information: whether the TCI domain can be used for notification of other transmission parameter types, the TCI domain
  • the second parameter may be used to determine the second information by using the type of the transmission parameter for the notification, which bits of the TCI domain may be borrowed for the transmitted transmission parameter type, based on the information notified in the second control signaling.
  • the TCI-PresentInDCI parameter associated with the CORESET in which the first control signaling is located is used to configure whether the TCI indicator field exists in the DCI of the DL-Grant sent in the CORESET, that is, whether the number in Table 1 exists. If the TCI-PresentInDCI associated with the CORESTE is not enabled, the TCI field does not exist in the DCI in the CORESET, and the number of bits used in the first transmission parameter does not vary with the transmission interval between the DCI and the PDSCH. Whether it is less than a predetermined threshold K changes.
  • the mechanism for determining the second information according to the first information is not activated; or the operable frequency domain range sent by the terminal
  • the frequency domain processing capability of the terminal is FRI (ie, the frequency domain range that the terminal can process is less than a predetermined threshold, such as less than 6 GHz)
  • the mechanism for determining the second information according to the first information is not started.
  • the CORESET of the lowest CORESETID in the time unit closest to the signal is configured with the CORESET of the airspace receiving parameter; for example, the CORESET of the lowest CORESETID in the time unit closest to the PDSCH/AP-CSI-RS is not configured with the airspace receiving parameter CORESET does not initiate a mechanism for determining the second information based on the first information.
  • the CORESET of the lowest CORESETID in the time domain symbol closest to the signal is configured with the CORESET of the airspace receiving parameter; for example, the CORESET of the lowest CORESETID in the time domain symbol closest to the PDSCH/AP-CSI-RS is not configured for airspace reception.
  • the CORESET of the parameter does not initiate a mechanism for determining the second information based on the first information.
  • Whether there is at least one TCI state in the TCI state pool associated with the signal, and the QCL parameter corresponding to the reference RS set in the TCI state includes airspace reception
  • the QCL parameter corresponding to one DL-RS in the TCI state includes the airspace receiving parameter, and the A mechanism for determining the second information.
  • the QCL parameters corresponding to the reference RS set in the TCI state include airspace receiving parameters; for example, MAC-CE activation associated with the PDSCH In the TCI state pool or the TCI state that can be indicated by the TCI field in the DCI, there is no TCI state. If the QCL parameter corresponding to one DL-RS in the TCI state includes the airspace receiving parameter, it does not start. A mechanism for determining the second information based on the first information.
  • the frequency domain range processing capability information reported by the first communication node for example, the frequency domain range that the terminal reports can be processed is FR1 (the frequency domain range that can be processed is less than 6 GHz), and the second information is not determined according to the first information.
  • the mechanism of information when the terminal reports that the frequency range that can be processed is FR2 (that is, the frequency domain range that can be processed includes greater than or equal to 6 GHz), the mechanism for determining the second information according to the first information is started.
  • the table referred to by the notified TCI field in the DCI is determined based on the relationship between the interval between the DCI and the PDSCH and the predetermined threshold K.
  • the table referenced by the TCI in the DCI is Table 7
  • the table referred to by TCI in DCI is Table 8.
  • the TCI state 10 - TCI state 17 and the TCI state 20 - TCI state 27 are configured by different high layer control signaling, wherein the high layer control signaling includes at least one of RRC signaling and MAC-CE signaling.
  • the spatial domain receiving parameter of the DMRS of the PDSCH is obtained according to a convention rule (for example, according to the configuration of the airspace receiving parameter of the CORESET of the lowest CORESETID in the latest time slot),
  • the other QCL parameter information of the DMRS of the PDSCH is obtained by referring to the TCI indication field in the DCI and referring to Table 7.
  • all the QCL parameters of the DMRS of the PDSCH are obtained by referring to the information indicated by the TCI indication field in the DCI and refer to Table 7, except that the configuration of Table 7 is limited.
  • the interval between the DCI and the PDSCH is greater than or equal to K
  • all QCL parameters of the DMRS of the PDSCH are obtained according to the information indicated by the TCI indication field in the DCI and are obtained with reference to Table 8.
  • TCI state value 0 TCI state10 1 TCI state11 2 TCI state12 3 TCI state13 4 TCI state14 5 TCI state15 6 TCI state16 7 TCI state17
  • TCI state value 0 TCI state20 1 TCI state21 2 TCI state22 3 TCI state23
  • One state is used to establish an association relationship between a DMRS group of Q PDSCHs and Q DL-RS sets, where Q is an integer greater than or equal to 1, as shown in Table 9, in a TCI state-n
  • An association between (DMRS group1, DL-RS set1) and (DMRS group2, DL-RS set2) is established, where DL-RS set1 includes ⁇ DL-RS1, DL-RS2 ⁇ , and DL-RS set2 includes DL- RS3, where DMRS group1 has a QCL relationship with respect to QCL parameters in QCL-type1 and DL-RS1, wherein each QCL-Type includes at least one of the following parameters: Doppler shift, Doppler extension (Doppler) Spread), average delay, delay spread, average gain, and spatial Rx parameter.
  • the DL-RS may be a CSI-RS/SSB/DMRS of PBCH, where the DMRS group may also be referred to as a QCL target reference signal, and the DL-RS may also be referred to as a QCL reference signal.
  • the QCL-Type in each TCI state in Table 7 includes a spatial domain receiving parameter, and the DL-RS set formed by the QCL parameter has a predetermined constraint, wherein the constraint condition includes at least one of the following:
  • the DL-RS set includes only one DL-RS; the DL-RS in this set has a QCL for the airspace reception parameter; the DL-RS terminal in this set can receive simultaneously; the DL-RS set is empty Set; the DL-RS in this set belongs to a packet, which can be assigned by the base station or reported by the terminal.
  • the parameters for the airspace reception between the two RSs are QCL, or the DL-RSs may be received by the terminal at the same time, or the DL-RSs including the airspace receiving parameters in the QCL-Type associated with the eight states in Table 7 are all DL- R100, or the QCL-Type associated with the DL-RS in the eight states in Table 7, does not include the airspace receiving parameter, and the airspace receiving parameter of the DMRS of the PDSCH at this time is agreed according to the agreed rules,
  • the table referenced by the TCI indication field included in the DCI is Table 7.
  • the table in which the TCI indication field in the DCI is referred to is Table 8. Because the configuration of the DL-RS associated with the airspace receiving parameters in the TCI state in Table 7 is limited, that is, there are only one or only a limited number of beams associated with these TCI states. Because the terminal has not decoded the DCI at this time, the terminal is required to know the spatial reception parameters of the PDSCH before decoding the DCI, and there is no such limitation in Table 8, so that two tables of Table 7 and Table 8 are needed.
  • the configuration of Table 7 is configured by high-level signaling. Different beams can be used to achieve different times. Even if the transmission time interval between DCI and PDSCH is less than K, multiple tables 7 can be configured.
  • the active time domain pattern such as the period and period offset of configuration table 7-1, configures the period and period offset of Table 7-2. Or there are two tables 7, namely Table 7-1 and Table 7-2, configuring the period and period offset of Table 7-1, and referring to Table 7-2 in the remaining time slots, that is, when DCI falls in Table 7-1 In the illustrated time slot, the TCI field notified in this DCI refers to Table 7-1. When the DCI falls in the remaining time slots, the TCI field notified in the DCI refers to Table 7-2.
  • Table 7-1 When DCI falls in the time slot in Table 7-1, the TCI indication field in DCI refers to Table 7-1, when DCI falls in Table 7- When the time slot is 2, the TCI indication field in the DCI refers to Table 7-2. When the DCI falls in other time slots, the TCI indication field in the DCI refers to Table 7-3.
  • the QCL information of the PDSCH is obtained by referring to the table referenced by the corresponding TCI in the slot in which the PDSCH is located according to the TCI indication information indicated in the DCI.
  • the time domain pattern corresponding to Table 7-1 to Table 7-3 is configured.
  • the QCL parameter of the DMRS of the PDSCH is according to the DCI.
  • the indicated TCI information is obtained by referring to Table 7-1.
  • the QCL parameter of the DMRS of the PDSCH refers to Table 7-2 according to the TCI information indicated in the DCI. get.
  • the QCL parameter of the DMRS of the PDSCH is obtained by referring to Table 8 according to the TCI information indicated in the DCI.
  • a table corresponding to the TCI parameter of the AP-CSI-RS is determined according to the relationship between the interval between the DCI and the AP-CSI-RS and the predetermined threshold.
  • the TCI indication information is used to indicate a QCL relationship between a DMRS group/CSI-RS port group and a DL-RS set, that is, one TCI index information corresponds to one state, and one state includes Q Correspondence between the DMRS group and the Q DL-RS sets, one DL-RS set includes one or more DL-RSs, and each DL-RS is associated with a QCL parameter set, indicating the DMRS group/CSI-RS port A reference signal in the group and one of the DL-RS sets associated therewith satisfy a QCL (quasi-co-location quasi-co-location) relationship with respect to the QCL parameter set.
  • the two reference signals satisfy a quasi co-location relationship with respect to a QCL parameter, and the QCL parameter indicating a reference signal can be obtained by the QCL parameter of two reference signals, wherein the QCL parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
  • Doppler shift Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, average gain, and spatial Rx parameter.
  • the two reference signals are representations of QCL.
  • the two reference signals are QCL at least with respect to the Spatial Rx parameter, and the two reference signals are not limited with respect to other QCL parameters.
  • the channel may also be a signal that transmits signals on the channel. For example, transmitting data signals on a data channel.
  • CCs component carriers
  • Serving cell IDs may be associated by different Serving cell IDs.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a method for transmitting control signaling according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 9, the process includes the following steps S902 and steps. S904.
  • step S902 second information is determined based on the first information.
  • step S904 the first control signaling is received according to the second information.
  • the second information includes at least one of the following: a number N of bits used in the first control signaling to notify the first transmission parameter, an index value referenced by the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling, and the first transmission. a corresponding mapping table between the values of the parameters, a type of the first transmission parameter notified by the predetermined indication field in the first control signaling, and location information of the bit used to notify the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling;
  • the first information includes: a relationship between a transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and a predetermined threshold K, where N and K are non-negative integers.
  • the value of the N when the relationship between the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is the first relationship, the value of the N includes N1; When the relationship between the transmission time interval between the signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is the second relationship, the value of the above N includes N2; wherein N1 and N2 are integers.
  • the relationship between the N1 and the N2 is at least one of the following: the N1 is greater than the N2; the difference between the N1 and the N2 is less than or equal to the number of bits occupied by the Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) field. The difference between the above N1 and the above N2 is less than or equal to the number of bits required to notify the second transmission parameter information.
  • TCI Transmission Configuration Indication
  • the corresponding mapping table when the relationship between the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is the first relationship, the corresponding mapping table is a first corresponding mapping table; When the relationship between the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is the second relationship, the corresponding mapping table is the second corresponding mapping table.
  • any one of the first corresponding mapping table, the second corresponding mapping table, the transmission parameter value set 1 and the transmission parameter value set 2 is determined by at least one of the following manners: mode one, sending The content included in the signaling information; the second method: the pre-agreed rules of the sending end and the receiving end; wherein the set of the transmission parameter values corresponds to the set of values of the first transmission parameter included in the first corresponding mapping table
  • the transmission parameter value set 2 corresponds to the value set of the first transmission parameter included in the second corresponding mapping table.
  • a downlink reference signal (DL-RS) of the associated spatial reception parameter in each state in the first corresponding mapping table is configured.
  • the DL-RS set includes only one DL-RS; when the first transmission parameter type is TCI, the downlink reference signal DL-RS of the associated spatial reception parameter in each state in the first corresponding mapping table is formed.
  • the spatial reception parameters between the DL-RSs in the DL-RS set satisfy the quasi co-location (QCL) relationship.
  • QCL quasi co-location
  • the DL-RS in the DL-RS set formed by the downlink reference signal DL-RS of the associated spatial reception parameter in each state in the first corresponding mapping table can be first.
  • the communication node is simultaneously received; when the first transmission parameter type is TCI, the DL-RS set formed by the downlink reference signal DL-RS of the associated spatial reception parameter in each state in the first corresponding mapping table is an empty set;
  • the first communication node is a communication node that receives at least one of the first signal and the first control signaling.
  • the type of the first transmission parameter is one or more transmission parameter types except the TCI transmission parameter type included in the foregoing first control signaling; or the first transmission parameter type is TCI transmission. parameter.
  • the first transmission parameter satisfies at least one of the following: the first transmission parameter is a transmission parameter of the first signal; and the first transmission parameter is a transmission parameter of the second signal.
  • the first signal or the second signal includes at least one of a demodulation reference signal, a measurement reference signal, a control channel signal, and a data channel signal; the first control signaling is physical layer control. Signaling.
  • the first information further includes at least one of the following information: information included in the second control signaling; and a transmission configuration corresponding to the control resource set (CORESET) where the first control signaling is located Whether the transmission configuration indication (TCI-PresentInDCI) is enabled; the relationship between the carrier frequency of the first signal or the second signal and the predetermined threshold G; the supported frequency range capability fed back by the first communication node; Whether the preset threshold K is 0; whether there is at least one CORESET configured with a spatial receiving parameter in the CORESET that the first communication node needs to detect; and whether at least one of the CORESET sets associated with the first communication node that needs to detect the dedicated search space exists a CORESET configured with a spatial receiving parameter; whether the CORESET having the lowest control resource set identity (CORESETID) in the time unit closest to the first signal or the second signal is configured with a CORESET of a spatial receiving parameter; The first signal or the second Whether the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID among the nearest
  • the first indication signaling is notified by the predetermined indication field.
  • the type of the first transmission parameter is a first type of transmission parameter; when the relationship between the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is a second relationship, the second control signal.
  • the type of the first transmission parameter that is notified by the predetermined indication field is a second type of transmission parameter.
  • the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal is less than the predetermined threshold K
  • the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal is a predetermined threshold
  • the relationship between K is the first relationship, and the transmission between the first control signaling and the first signal when the transmission time interval between the control signaling and the first signal is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold K
  • the relationship between the time interval and the predetermined threshold K is the foregoing second relationship; or, when the transmission time interval between the control signaling and the first signal is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold K, the first control signaling and The relationship between the transmission time interval between the first signals and the predetermined threshold K is the first relationship, and the first control is performed when the transmission time interval between the control signaling and the first signal is greater than the predetermined threshold K
  • the relationship between the transmission time interval between the signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is the foregoing second relationship; or, in the above control signaling and the first signal When the transmission time interval is greater than or equal to the
  • the method according to the above embodiment can be implemented by means of software plus a necessary general hardware platform, and of course, by hardware, but in many cases, the former is A better implementation.
  • the technical solution of the present application which is essential or contributes to the related art, may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium (such as ROM/RAM, disk, CD-ROM).
  • the instructions include a number of instructions for causing a terminal device (which may be a cell phone, a computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform the methods described in various embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a method for determining information according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 10, the process includes the following step S1002.
  • Step S1002 Determine second information according to the first information.
  • the second information includes at least one of the following: a quasi-co-located QCL parameter of the first signal; a transmission mode of the first signal in a time domain position where the second signal is located; and a first signal in a time domain position where the second signal is located Receiving mode; wherein the first information comprises at least one of the following: whether the second signal exists in a predetermined time window after the specific control resource set CORESET, and the interval between the first signal and the specific CORESET is equal to a predetermined threshold X1
  • the relationship between the time interval between the second signal and the specific CORESET and the predetermined threshold X2 the relationship between the time interval between the first signal and the first control signaling and the predetermined threshold X1, a relationship between a time interval between the second signal and the second control signaling and a predetermined threshold X2, a relationship between the first spatial receiving parameter corresponding to the first signal and the second spatial receiving parameter corresponding to the second signal, wherein X1 and X2 are real numbers.
  • the specific CORESET represents a predetermined CORESET, that is, a CORESET obtained according to a predetermined rule.
  • the second information is determined by the first information, the second information includes at least one of: a quasi-co-location QCL parameter of the first signal; and a manner of transmitting the first signal in a time domain position where the second signal is located And a receiving manner of the first signal in the time domain position where the second signal is located; wherein the first information includes at least one of the following information: whether the second signal exists in a predetermined time window after the specific control resource set CORESET a relationship between an interval between the first signal and the specific CORESET and a predetermined threshold X1, a relationship between a time interval between the second signal and the specific CORESET and a predetermined threshold X2, the first signal and the first a relationship between a time interval between control signaling and a predetermined threshold X1, a relationship between a time interval between the second signal and the second control signaling and a predetermined threshold X2, and a first space corresponding to the first signal And receiving a relationship between the parameter and the second spatial receiving parameter corresponding to
  • the first signal is transmitted or received according to the determined second information. That is, the relationship between the signal and the control channel resource, or the time interval between the control signaling of the signal and the scheduling signal and the predetermined threshold, determines the multiplexing problem between the two signals, or the reception of the two signals.
  • the invention overcomes the defects that the terminal detection control signaling has a delay in the related art, and the radio frequency beam emitted at the same time is limited, and the signal cannot be correctly received.
  • the execution body of the foregoing steps may be a base station or the like, but is not limited thereto.
  • the format of at least one of the foregoing first control signaling and the second control signaling may be determined in combination with the method described in Embodiment 1 above.
  • the first control signaling is physical layer dynamic control signaling for scheduling the first signal
  • the second control signaling is physical layer dynamic control signaling for scheduling the second signal
  • the specific CORESET satisfies at least one of the following characteristics: the CORESET is a CORESET having the lowest control resource set identifier CORESET ID in the time domain symbol closest to the first signal; the CORESET is the closest to the first signal.
  • All of the carrier units CC have a CORESET with a lowest CORESETID;
  • the CORESET is a CORESET having a lowest CORESETID among predetermined CCs in a time unit closest to at least one of the first signal and the second signal;
  • the CORESET is a distance from the first At least one of a signal and the second signal CORESET having the lowest CORESETID among the predetermined CC groups in the near time unit;
  • the above CORESET is the CORESET in the predetermined M time domain symbols in one time unit, where M is less than or equal to the number of time domain symbols included in the above time unit .
  • the QCL parameter of the first signal is obtained according to the QCL parameter of the CORESET; in the first signal and the CORESET
  • the QCL parameter of the first signal is obtained by the QCL parameter configured in the configuration information of the first signal.
  • the QCL parameter of the first signal when the interval between the first signal and the CORESET is less than the predetermined threshold X1, the QCL parameter of the first signal has a higher priority than the QCL parameter of the second signal; When the interval between the CORESETs is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold X1, the QCL parameter of the first signal has a lower priority than the QCL parameter of the second signal.
  • a frequency division multiplexing manner is not allowed between the first signal and the second signal;
  • the interval between the signal and the CORESET is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold X1, the first signal and the second signal are allowed to adopt frequency division multiplexing.
  • At least one of the first signal and the second signal includes at least one of a downlink measurement reference signal, a downlink synchronization signal, a downlink demodulation reference signal, a downlink data channel signal, and a downlink control channel. signal.
  • the predetermined threshold X1 is equal to the predetermined threshold X2; and/or the QCL parameter of the second signal is based on an interval between the control information for scheduling the second signal and the second signal and the predetermined threshold X2 The relationship between the two is determined.
  • the first signal satisfies at least one of the following features: the first signal is a downlink signal scheduled by a physical layer dynamic control signaling; the first signal is a downlink physical control channel signal; and the first signal is scheduled.
  • the interval between the control signaling and the first signal is less than the predetermined threshold X1 described above.
  • the second signal satisfies at least one of the following: a control signaling for scheduling the second signal is before a time domain symbol where the first signal is located; a control signaling for scheduling the second signal, and the foregoing The interval between the time domain symbols in which the signal is located is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold X3; the interval between the control signaling for scheduling the second signal and the initial time domain symbol of the second signal is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold X3; the second signal is a downlink signal of physical layer dynamic control signaling scheduling; the second signal is a periodic downlink measurement reference signal; wherein X3 is a real number.
  • control signaling includes at least one of the following signaling: physical layer control signaling, MAC-CE control signaling, and RRC control signaling.
  • the QCL parameter of the first signal is determined according to the QCL parameter of the second signal; and the foregoing time does not exist in the predetermined time window after the CORESET
  • the QCL parameter of the first signal is not determined according to the QCL parameter of the second signal; and/or the second signal is present in a predetermined time window after the CORESET, the first signal and the scheduling of the first signal
  • the QCL parameter of the first signal is not obtained according to the QCL parameter of the CORESET; the second signal is not present in the predetermined time window after the CORESET, the first signal and
  • the QCL parameter of the first signal is acquired according to the QCL parameter of the CORESET.
  • a spatial reception parameter of the second signal is different from a spatial reception parameter of the first signal; and spatial reception of the second signal
  • the spatial filter corresponding to the parameter and the spatial filter corresponding to the spatial receiving parameter of the first signal cannot be simultaneously played at the first communication node; the second signal and the first signal belong to different CCs; when the first signal is located The intersection between the domain location and the time domain location where the second signal is located is a non-empty set; the first signal and the second signal are in the same time domain position; the second signal has a higher priority than the first The priority of the signal.
  • the determining the second information according to the first information includes: determining, according to the first information, at least one of the following information: the first a priority between the signal and the QCL parameter of the second signal; a priority between the QCL parameter configured in the configuration information of the first signal and the QCL parameter of the specific CORESET; when the first signal and the first signal are scheduled Whether the QCL parameter of the first signal is obtained according to the QCL parameter of the specific CORESET when the interval between the control signaling is less than the predetermined threshold X1 described above.
  • the determining the second information according to the first information includes determining at least one of the following information according to the first information. Whether the first signal is received at a time domain position where the second signal is located; whether a control channel is detected at a time domain position where the second signal is located; and at the time domain position where the second signal is located, the first a priority between a QCL parameter of the signal and a QCL parameter of the second signal; whether the first signal and the second signal are frequency division multiplexed; whether the first signal can include a second time domain position The time domain location where the signal is located.
  • the determining the second information according to the first information includes determining at least one of the following information according to the first information. Whether the first signal is sent in the time domain position where the second signal is located; whether the control channel is transmitted in the time domain position where the second signal is located; and the first time in the time domain position where the second signal is located a priority between a QCL parameter of the signal and a QCL parameter of the second signal; whether the first signal and the second signal are frequency division multiplexed; whether the first signal can include a second time domain position The time domain location where the signal is located.
  • the time domain location where the second signal is located includes one of the following time domain locations: a time domain symbol in which the second signal is located; and a time unit in which the second signal is located.
  • the method further includes: not receiving a configuration that is configured to: when an interval between the first control signaling and the first signal that schedules the first signal is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold X1, scheduling When the interval between the second control signaling of the second signal and the second signal is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold X2, the first signal and the second signal do not satisfy the QCL relationship with respect to the spatial receiving parameter; The interval between the first control signaling of the first signal and the first signal is less than the predetermined threshold X1, and the interval between the second control signaling and the second signal for scheduling the second signal is greater than or equal to the foregoing
  • the QCL parameter of the first signal is determined according to the QCL parameter of the second signal; when the interval between the first control signaling and the first signal for scheduling the first signal is less than the predetermined threshold X1, When the interval between the second control signaling and the second signal of the second signal is less than the predetermined threshold X2, the foregoing QCL a priority parameter signal
  • the first information further includes at least one of the following: whether the control signaling included in the specific CORESET includes a transmission configuration indication TCI indication field; and at least one of the first signal and the second signal a relationship between the carrier frequency and the predetermined threshold G; whether at least one of the preset threshold X1 and the predetermined threshold X2 is 0; whether there is at least one CORESET configured with a spatial receiving parameter in the specific CORESET; the first communication Whether there is at least one CORESET configured with a spatial receiving parameter in the CORESET set that the node needs to detect; whether there is at least one TCI state in the TCI state pool associated with the first signal or the second signal, wherein the TCI state and the reference are
  • the QCL parameter corresponding to the signal set includes a spatial receiving parameter; whether there is at least one TCI state in the activated TCI state pool associated with the first signal or the second signal, and the QCL parameter corresponding to the reference signal set in the TCI state Include a spatial receiving parameter; wherein the first communication no
  • the determining the second information according to the first information includes the following At least one of the modes: when the first signal and the second signal satisfy a QCL relationship with respect to a spatial receiving parameter, the time domain symbol in which the first signal is available includes a time domain symbol in which the second signal is located; the first signal and the foregoing When the second signal does not satisfy the QCL relationship with respect to the spatial receiving parameter, the time domain symbol in which the first signal can be included does not include the time domain symbol in which the second signal is located; the spatial filter corresponding to the first spatial receiving parameter and the foregoing When the first communication node corresponding to the spatial receiving parameter of the second spatial receiving parameter can be simultaneously generated, the time domain symbol in which the first signal can be included includes the time domain symbol in which the second signal is located; and the spatial filtering corresponding to the receiving parameter in the first space When the first communication node of the spatial filter corresponding to
  • time domain symbol in which the first signal may be in the time domain symbol does not include the time domain symbol in which the second signal is located may be in the time domain symbol position where the second signal is located, and the first signal is not transmitted and/or not received.
  • a signal is used for rate matching.
  • the first information is a relationship between a time interval between the first signal and the first control signaling and a predetermined threshold X1
  • the second information is a quasi-co-location QCL of the first signal. And determining, according to the first information, that the second information comprises at least one of the following: the first signal is on a different time domain symbol of a time unit, and the QCL parameter remains unchanged; the first signal is on a different time unit.
  • the QCL parameters may be different; the first signal B1 has a corresponding relationship between the QCL parameter and the A time units; and the QCL of the first signal in each of the A time units in which the first signal is located
  • the parameter is obtained according to a QCL parameter of a CORESET having a predetermined feature in a time unit closest to the time unit; and the first signal and the first control signaling in each time unit are in the A time units in which the first signal is located
  • time unit may be one time slot, one subframe, or other time units.
  • the first information is a relationship between a time interval between the first signal and the first control signaling and a predetermined threshold X1
  • the second information is a quasi-co-location QCL of the first signal.
  • determining, according to the first information, that the second information comprises at least one of: according to the time interval between the first signal and the first control signaling in the first time unit of the A time units, and the foregoing predetermined Determining a QCL parameter of the first signal, the QCL parameter of the first signal in the A time units remains unchanged; each time in the A1 time unit in which the first signal is located
  • the QCL parameter of the first signal in the unit is obtained according to a QCL parameter of a CORESET having a predetermined characteristic in a time unit closest to the time unit, wherein the first signal in the last one of the A1 time units and the above
  • the interval between the first control signaling is less than the predetermined threshold X1; the QCL parameter of the first signal remains unchanged in the A2 time units in which the first signal
  • the base station and the terminal agree that the multiple downlink signals on the same time domain symbol satisfy the QCL relationship, that is, the terminal does not want the multiple downlink signals configured by the base station in the same time domain symbol to not satisfy the QCL relationship. Or the QCL relationship is satisfied between multiple downlink signals on the same time domain symbol.
  • the plurality of downlink signals include at least two of the following signals: a PDSCH data signal, a CORESET, a downlink measurement reference signal, and a downlink signal of multiple CCs.
  • the terminal does not want to receive the downlink signal that does not satisfy the following configuration on a time domain symbol, and does not satisfy the QCL relationship between multiple downlink signals; or the DMRS of multiple downlink signals and the lowest CORESETID does not satisfy the QCL in one time domain symbol; relationship.
  • the DMRS of the two PDSCHs belonging to different CCs (component carriers) that the terminal wants to configure at the same time needs to satisfy the QCL relationship.
  • the terminal needs to satisfy the QCL relationship between the PDSCH/DMRS on the CC1 configured at the same time and the DMRS on the CORESET on the CC2.
  • the terminal needs to satisfy the QCL relationship between the DMRSs of the two CORESETs that do not use the CC configured at the same time.
  • the terminal needs to satisfy the QCL relationship between the DMRSs belonging to the PDSCH/DMRS on CC1 and the CORESET on CC2 configured at the same time.
  • FIGS. 6a-6d a plurality of downlink signals belonging to different CCs need to satisfy the QCL relationship
  • FIGS. 7a-7d a plurality of downlink signals belonging to the same CC need to satisfy the QCL relationship.
  • Figure 7e is a QCL relationship between two CSI-RSs in a CC.
  • the lowest CORESETID satisfies at least one of the following: the lowest CORESETID is the lowest CORESETID of the time domain symbols closest to the time domain symbol; the lowest CORESETID is the closest to the time domain symbol The lowest CORESETID in the time slot; the distance between the CORESET and the time domain symbol is less than a predetermined threshold K.
  • different CCs may correspond to different Serving cell IDs.
  • At least one of the following information is determined: a QCL parameter of the first signal, a first signal and a symbol on the same time domain symbol.
  • the specific CORESET satisfies at least one of: the CORESET is a CORESET having the lowest CORESETID among the time domain symbols closest to the downlink signal; the CORESET is the closest to the downlink signal a CORESET having a lowest CORESETID in the time slot; in the CORESET, the terminal needs to detect at least one of a scheduled downlink signal and a DCI of the channel; and the control signal information for scheduling the first signal is not included in the CORESET; Control signaling information for scheduling the second signal is included in the CORESET; the CORESET is associated with at least one dedicated search space.
  • a QCL parameter of the first signal is acquired according to a QCL parameter of the CORESER; when the first signal and a minimum When the interval between CORESETIDs is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold, the QCL parameter of the first signal is obtained by the QCL parameter configured in the downlink signal configuration information.
  • a QCL parameter of the first signal when an interval between the first signal and the CORESET is less than a predetermined threshold, a QCL parameter of the first signal has a higher priority than a QCL parameter of the second signal; when the first signal and the When the interval between CORESETs is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold, the QCL parameter of the first signal has a lower priority than the QCL parameter of the second signal.
  • the first signal and the second signal are not frequency division multiplexed; when the first signal and the CORESET The first signal and the second signal may be frequency division multiplexed when the interval between them is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold.
  • the QCL parameter includes at least one of the following parameters: Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, average gain. ), the spatial Rx parameter.
  • the first signal includes at least one of a downlink measurement reference signal, a downlink synchronization signal, a downlink demodulation reference signal, a downlink data channel signal, and a downlink control channel signal.
  • the second signal comprises at least one of a downlink measurement reference signal, a downlink synchronization signal, a downlink demodulation reference signal, a downlink data channel signal, and a downlink control channel signal.
  • the predetermined threshold is equal to a second predetermined threshold, wherein a QCL parameter of the second signal is based on an interval between the control information of the scheduled second signal and the second signal and the second predetermined The relationship between the thresholds determines the QCL parameters of the second signal.
  • the correlation NR specifies that when the interval between the DCI and the PDSCH is less than the predetermined threshold K, the PDSCH is received using the airspace receiving parameter of the lowest CORESETID in the latest slot, because the DCI has no solution when the terminal buffers the PDSCH. Out, you need to use a known beam buffer PDSCH.
  • the PDSCH may exist anywhere in the time window of the K time domain symbols after the DCI. At this time, the PDSCH terminals in the K time domain symbol time windows after the DCI need to adopt the beam buffer PDSCH in the lowest CORESETID, but may not actually These potential PDSCHs exist, but the terminal still needs to cache these PDSCHs.
  • the problem is that if there is a periodic CSI-RS in this time window and the airspace reception parameters of the periodic CSI-RS are different from the airspace reception parameters of the PDSCH that the terminal needs to buffer, it is necessary to determine the priority between the two.
  • the first method is that the base station and the terminal agree that the airspace receiving parameters of at least one of the downlink signal and the channel in the window are based on the airspace receiving parameter of the CORESET with the lowest CORESETID, and the other QCL parameters of at least one of the downlink signal and the channel are also The lowest CORESET ID is used, or other QCL parameters are obtained according to the downlink signal or channel configuration information, for example, according to the QCL parameter configuration information in the configuration information of the periodic CSI-RS.
  • Manner 2 The base station and the terminal agree that when the distance between the periodic CSI-RS and the CORESET of the lowest CORESETID in the latest time slot is less than a predetermined threshold K, at least the spatial domain receiving parameter of the periodic CSI-RS is better than the simultaneous domain symbol.
  • the spatial domain receiving parameter of the potential PDSCH when the distance between the periodic CSI-RS and the CORESET of the lowest CORESETID in the latest time slot is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold K, the spatial domain receiving parameter of the PDSCH on the same time domain symbol is better than the simultaneous domain symbol.
  • the airspace receiving parameters of the CSI-RS The airspace receiving parameters of the CSI-RS.
  • the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID in the slot closest to the periodic CSI-RS on the slot is CORESET0 on the slotn, and when the PDSCH and the CSI-RS are on the same time domain symbol on the slot, the CSI-RS is used.
  • the beam receives the CSI-RS and the PDSCH, that is, the spatial domain receiving parameter of the PDSCH has a lower priority than the spatial receiving parameter of the periodic CSI-RS.
  • one way is to receive the PDSCH by using the spatial receiving parameter of the periodic CSI-RS, thereby reducing the number of beam switching times of the terminal on the slotn, or the terminal and the base station agree that there is no CSI in the slotn.
  • the PDSCH is received using a beam with a minimum CORESET from the PDSCH, as shown in FIG.
  • the lowest CORESETID in the time slot closest to the periodic CSI-RS on slotn+2 is also CORESET0 in slotn (the terminal does not need to detect CORESET in slotn+1, slotn+2), at this time the period CSI on slotn+2 If the distance between the RS domain CORESET0 is greater than the predetermined threshold, if the PDSCH and the CSI-RS are on the same time domain symbol on the slotn+2, the PDSCH beam is used to receive the PDSCH and the CSI-RS, that is, the PDSCH at this time The airspace receiving parameter has a higher priority than the spatial receiving parameter of the periodic CSI-RS.
  • the measurement CSI-RS is discarded. Because the terminal needs to buffer the PDSCH scheduled by CORESET0 on the slot, the DCI has not been solved yet, and there may be no PDSCH. In this case, the periodic CSI-RS is received preferentially, and the terminal on the slotn+2 needs to buffer the DCI corresponding to the PDSCH. It has been solved, and the PDSCH at this time is that the terminal determines that the base station has scheduled.
  • the second information is determined according to the first information, where the second information includes at least one of the following information: a QCL parameter of the first signal, whether the control channel is detected on the first signal, whether the first signal is received, And a time domain symbol position at which the first signal can be.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following information: whether a second signal is present in the predetermined time window after the specific CORESET.
  • the specific CORESET satisfies at least one of the following features: the CORESET is a CORESET having a lowest CORESETID in a time domain symbol closest to the second signal; the specific CORESET is a distance from the second a CORESET having the lowest CORESETID in the most recent time slot of the signal; in the CORESET, the terminal needs to detect at least one of the scheduled downlink signal and the DCI of the channel; the CORESET is in the time domain symbol closest to the first signal The CORESET having the lowest CORESETID; the specific CORESET is the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID in the slot closest to the first signal.
  • the first signal includes at least one of the following: an aperiodic downlink measurement reference signal, a downlink layer data channel signal scheduled by the physical layer dynamic control signaling, and a downlink signal scheduled by the physical layer dynamic control signaling, and Downlink physical control channel signal.
  • the second signal satisfies at least one of the following features: the second signal is a previously scheduled signal; the second signal is a periodic downlink measurement reference signal; and the second signal is a non-periodic downlink Measuring a reference signal, wherein an interval between a DCI in which the aperiodic measurement reference signal is scheduled and the aperiodic measurement reference signal is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold; the second signal is a semi-persistent PDSCH, wherein DCI and SPS of the SPS-PDSCH are activated The interval between the PDSCHs is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold; the second signal is a dynamically scheduled PDSCH, wherein the interval between the DCI and the PDSCH of the dynamically scheduled PDSCH is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold.
  • a QCL parameter of the first signal is obtained according to a QCL parameter of the second signal; a predetermined time window after the specific CORESET When the second signal is not present, the QCL parameter of the second signal is not included in the QCL parameter acquisition parameter of the first signal.
  • the second communication node agrees that the first signal does not exist.
  • the second communication node does not detect the control channel on the first signal on the time domain symbol in which the second signal is located.
  • the spatial domain receiving parameter of the second signal is different from the spatial domain receiving parameter of the first signal, or the spatial filter corresponding to the spatial receiving parameter of the second signal corresponds to the spatial receiving parameter of the first signal.
  • the first communication node of the spatial filter cannot be played at the same time.
  • the second signal and the first signal belong to different CCs.
  • the base station schedules the PDSCH1 to the terminal, wherein the DCI of the PDSCH1 (this DCI is in the CORESET1 in FIG. 1a) and the distance of the PDSCH1 are greater than a predetermined threshold K, so that in the slotn
  • the medium terminal definitely knows that the base station has scheduled PDSCH1 in the slot, so that the QCL parameter of the PDSCH1 can be acquired by scheduling the information indicated in the DCI of the PDSCH1.
  • the terminal also needs to continue to detect at least one of CORESET0 and CORESET2.
  • the DCI in CORESET0 or CORESET2 may schedule PDSCH2 for the terminal, for example, PDSCH2 and PDSCH1 may be in different CCs, because when receiving the potential PDSCH2 The DCI terminal of the scheduled PDSCH2 has not been solved yet.
  • the potential PDSCH2 needs to receive the PDSCH2 by using the beam with the lowest CORESETID of all the CCs in the slot.
  • the PDSCH2 needs to be received by the beam of CORESET0, and the PDSCH1 is dynamically indicated.
  • the beam by the airspace receiving parameter information indicated in the DCI
  • the base station schedules a channel-state information reference signal (CSI-RS) to the terminal, where the interval between the DCI and the aperiodic measurement reference signal for scheduling the aperiodic CSI-RS is greater than a predetermined threshold.
  • CSI-RS channel-state information reference signal
  • the terminal also needs to detect CORESET0.
  • CORESET0 may schedule PDSCH for the terminal in slotn.
  • the priority of the QCL parameters of the PDSCH and CSI-RS needs to be determined.
  • the terminal receives the CSI-RS and the potential PDSCH by using the aperiodic measurement reference signal at least on the time domain symbol where the CSI-RS is located, and there is no aperiodic measurement in the slotn.
  • the QCL parameter of the potential PDSCH may be obtained by using the QCL parameter of the CORESET of the lowest CORESETID in the slotn, or the receive beam receiving of the aperiodic CSI-RS in the time domain symbol in which the potential PDSCH is located in the slotn is specified. PDSCH.
  • the QCL parameter of the PDSCH is not necessarily obtained by using the QCL parameter of the COSTOP with the lowest CORESETID of the PDSCH, and also depends on the PDSCH. Whether there is a second signal on the time domain symbol, and when the second signal is present, at least the spatial domain receiving parameter of the first signal is determined according to the spatial domain receiving parameter of the second signal, and when the second signal is not present, the spatial signal is closest to the PDSCH.
  • the QCL parameter of the CORESET with the lowest CORESETID acquires the QCL parameter of the PDSCH, wherein the QCL parameter includes at least the airspace reception parameter.
  • the airspace reception parameter acquires the airspace reception parameter of the PDSCH, instead of the airspace reception parameter acquisition of the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID in the slot closest to the PDSCH, that is, the airspace reception parameter that does not acquire the PDSCH according to the airspace of CORESET0.
  • the PDSCH when the spacing between the PDSCH and the DCI of the scheduling PDSCH is less than a predetermined threshold K, the PDSCH needs to receive the PDSCH using the receive beam of the CORESET in the slot closest to the PDSCH, and the potential PDSCH may exist in the slot.
  • the COPD1 In any time domain symbol, so that the COPD1 is in the time domain symbol, it is necessary to receive the potential PDSCH and CORESET1 at the same time.
  • the receiving beam of CORESET1 is different from the receiving beam of CORESET0, the two receiving beam terminals cannot be simultaneously output. At this time, it is necessary to specify the priority between the two.
  • One way is to specify that the potential PDSCH and CORESET1 on CORESET1 are QCL at least with respect to the airspace receiving parameter. Another way is to specify that the PDSCH does not exist on CORESET1, wherein the interval between the PDSCH and the DCI of the scheduling PDSCH is less than a predetermined threshold K.
  • the QCL parameter of the PDSCH is not obtained according to the QCL parameter of the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID in the slot closest to the PDSCH (as the QCL parameter of the PDSCH in FIG. 1e is not obtained according to the QCL parameter of CORESET0), but according to the time closest to the PDSCH.
  • the QCL parameter acquisition of the CORESET with the lowest CORESETID (the QCL parameter of the PDSCH in Figure 1e is obtained according to the QCL parameter of CORESET1).
  • the base station when the slotn has determined that the base station schedules the PDSCH for the terminal, that is, the interval between the DCI and the PDSCH for scheduling the PDSCH is greater than a predetermined threshold K, and the base station also needs to detect the CORESET for the semi-static configuration of the terminal on the slotn.
  • the terminal is in the time domain symbol where the PDSCH is located, when the airspace receiving parameters between the CORESET and the PDSCH are different, the terminal does not need to receive and detect the CORESET on the time domain symbol, or the terminal and the base station.
  • the DMRS of the PDSCH at this time and the CORESET on the same time domain symbol as the PDSCH are QCL at least with respect to the airspace reception parameter.
  • the terminal and the base station agree that when the PDSCH and the CORESET are on the same time domain symbol and the receiving beams corresponding to the airspace receiving parameters of the two are different, the receiving beam corresponding to the spatial receiving parameter of the CORESET receives the PDSCH and the CORESET.
  • the first problem is how to obtain the distance between the PDSCH and the DCI of the scheduled PDSCH, including the following two acquisition methods.
  • the time interval acquisition mode 1 is based on a time interval between the start symbol position of the PDSCH and the DCI in the first one of the A time slots occupied by the PDSCH and a predetermined threshold X1 (for example, a K value, of course, the present application)
  • a predetermined threshold X1 for example, a K value, of course, the present application
  • the method of obtaining the QCL parameters of the PDSCH is not excluded. For example, if the time interval is less than the predetermined threshold X1, the QCL parameter of the PDSCH is based on a specific CORESET in the latest slot from the PDSCH (for example, The QCL parameter of the CORESET with the lowest CORESET ID in the time slot acquires the QCL parameter of the PDSCH. If the time interval is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold X1, the information indicated in the QCL parameter DCI of the PDSCH is acquired, as shown in FIG. 4b. .
  • the second time interval is obtained according to the second time interval between the start symbol position of the PDSCH and the DCI in each of the A time slots occupied by the PDSCH and a predetermined threshold X1 (for example, a K value, of course, the present application also
  • a predetermined threshold X1 for example, a K value, of course, the present application also
  • the method of obtaining the QCL parameters of the PDSCH in each time slot is obtained, and the interval between the PDSCH and the DCI in the previous A1 time slots is less than a predetermined threshold X1, and then A1 time is obtained.
  • the QCL parameter of the PDSCH in the slot acquires the QCL parameter of the PDSCH according to the QCL parameter of a specific CORESET in the nearest slot of the PDSCH (such as the CORESET with the lowest CORESETID in the slot), and the PDSCH of the A2 time slot
  • the interval between the DCIs is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold X1, and the information indicated in the QCL parameter DCI of the PDSCH is acquired, as shown in FIG. 4a.
  • Another problem is that the QCL parameter acquisition of the CORESET having a predetermined feature in the slot closest to the PDSCH has the following two ways of understanding.
  • QCL acquisition mode 1 The QCL parameters of the PDSCH in the A time slots are obtained according to the QCL parameters of the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID among the most recent of the most recent time slots among the A time slots occupied by the PDSCH, and the PDSCH is in the A
  • the QCL parameter acquisition mode in the time slot is unchanged, or the QCL parameter of the PDSCH in the A time slots remains unchanged.
  • QCL acquisition mode 2 obtain QCL parameters of the PDSCH in the time slot according to the QCL parameter of the CORESET with the lowest CORESETID in the time slot closest to the time slot in each slot of the PDSCH occupied by the PDSCH, and the PDSCH is in the A
  • the QCL parameter acquisition manner in the slot may be different, or the QCL parameter of the PDSCH in the A slots may be changed.
  • the time interval acquisition modes one and two can be arbitrarily matched with the QCL parameter acquisition modes one and two.
  • the time interval between the foremost time slot and the DCI among the three time slots occupied by the PDSCH is less than a predetermined threshold K. Then, the QCL parameters of the PDSCH in the three slots are obtained according to the QCL parameter of the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID in the slot closest to the first slot (ie, the QCL parameter of CORESET0 in the slotn), and the PDSCH is in the PDSCH. The QCL parameters in the three time slots remain unchanged.
  • the PDSCH is at 3
  • the QCL parameters in the time slots acquire the QCL parameters of the PDSCH according to the QCL parameters of the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID in the time slot closest to each time slot, and the QCL parameters of the PDSCH in the three time slots may be different or the same.
  • the time interval acquisition mode 2 and the QCL acquisition mode are used, as shown in FIG. 4d, according to the relationship between the time interval between each time slot and the DCI among the three time slots occupied by the PDSCH and the predetermined threshold K, 3 is obtained.
  • the QCL parameters of each time slot in each time slot are acquired according to the CORESET acquisition or according to the information indicated by the DCI.
  • the PDSCH is in the multiple time slots ( That is, the QCL parameter in slotn, slotn+1) remains unchanged in Figure 4d, and the PDSCH is obtained according to the QCL parameter of the CORESET with the lowest CORESETID in the most recent slot of the plurality of slots (i.e., slotn).
  • the QCL parameter, the interval between the PDSCH and the DCI in the slotn+2 is greater than K, and the QCL parameter of the PDSCH in the slotn+2 is obtained according to the information indicated by the DCI.
  • the time interval acquisition mode 2 and the QCL acquisition mode 2 are used, as shown in FIG. 4a, according to the relationship between the time interval between each time slot and the DCI among the three time slots occupied by the PDSCH and the predetermined threshold K,
  • the QCL parameters of each of the three time slots are acquired according to the CORESET acquisition or according to the information indicated by the DCI.
  • the PDSCH is in the multiple time slots.
  • the QCL parameter of the PDSCH in each slot in slotn, slotn+1 in Figure 4d the QCL parameter of the PDSCH is obtained according to the QCL parameter of the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID in the most recent slot in this slot, slotn
  • the interval between the PDSCH and the DCI in +2 is greater than K, and the QCL parameter of the PDSCH in the slotn+2 is obtained according to the information indicated by the DCI, and the PDSCH judges and schedules the CORESET0 in each of the three slots.
  • the interval between the two, when the interval is less than K the QCL parameter of the PDSCH is obtained using the QCL parameter of the CORESET of the lowest CORESETID in the most recent slot in the slot closest to the slot.
  • the QCL parameter of the PDSCH is obtained by using the QCL parameter indicated in the DCI.
  • the beam is received by the beam of CORESET0 in the slotn on the slotn
  • the PDSCH is received by the beam of the CORESET1 of the slotn+1 on the slotn+1
  • the QCL indicated by the DCI in the CORESET0 of the slotn is used on the slotn+2.
  • the parameters determine the receive beam on slotn+2. This is because the terminal has not demodulated the DCI in the K time-domain symbols, and the PDSCH is also buffered.
  • the CORESET0 of the slotn and the CORESET1 of the slotn+1 may all schedule data for the terminal.
  • the terminal is in the slotn before the DCI is detected. +1 needs to buffer the PDSCH scheduled by at least one of CORESET0 and CORESET1.
  • the receiving capability of the terminal is limited, for example, only one receiving beam can be played, each time slot in the K range where the DCI and PDSCH are less than a predetermined threshold In the PDSCH, the QCL parameter is acquired using the CORESET of the lowest CORESETID in the slot closest to the PDSCH in this slot.
  • the interval between the PDSCH and the DCI is greater than 1, whether the A2 time slots correspond to a set of QCL parameters (as shown in FIG. 4e), or whether the A2 slots respectively correspond to different sets of QCL parameters (as shown in FIG. 4f). Specifically, which way is further agreed by the base station and the terminal, or the base station notifies by signaling information.
  • the combination of the specific time interval acquisition mode and the QCL parameter acquisition mode may be agreed between the terminal and the base station, or may be notified by the base station through signaling information.
  • K is 26 time-domain symbols
  • the PDSCH scheduled by CORESET0 on slotn spans 3 time slots, namely ⁇ slotn, slotn+1, slotn+2 ⁇ .
  • the DCI when two intervals between the PDSCH and the DCI are greater than the predetermined threshold K, the DCI notifies different QCL parameters for different time slots, so that the corresponding QCL needs to be configured for each time slot in the DCI.
  • the parameters are not excluded in this embodiment.
  • the base station configures the QCL parameters of one of the time slots for multiple time slots in the DCI (for example, configuring the QCL parameter in slotn+2, that is, configuring the QCL parameter in the first time slot)
  • the QCL parameters in other time slots are configured through higher layer signaling, or the QCL parameters in other time slots are obtained according to the QCL parameters configured by the DCI, such as polling in multiple time slots, such as DCI and high layer signaling.
  • the high layer signaling may be RRC signaling or a MAC-CE command.
  • the high-level signaling may be high-level signaling for notifying the candidate TCI state in the DCI, for example, when the DCI notifies the TCI of the slotn+2 to be TCI state2 (the DCI is notified in the DCI that the TCI domain includes 3 bits, corresponding to the activated 8 TCI states), Then the TCI state of the PDSCH in slotn+3 corresponds to TCI state3.
  • one PDSCH may be data repeated transmission in occupying a plurality of time slots, or may transmit different data in multiple time slots.
  • one state in the TCI domain notified in the DCI corresponds to multiple relationships, and different relationships correspond to different time units or different time unit sets occupied by the PDSCH, and each relationship corresponds to a time unit occupied by the PDSCH, or a time unit.
  • a set, a relationship includes a relationship between Z DMRS groups and Z RS Sets, a one-to-one correspondence between Z DMRS groups and Z RS Sets, and a DMRS group and a corresponding RS Set in the corresponding time unit Or on a set of time units, a QCL parameter set satisfies the QCL relationship.
  • the above CORESET having the lowest CORESETID is the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID among all the CORESETs that need to be detected by the terminals included in all the CCs in the above time unit;
  • the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID is the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID among all the CORESETs that need to be detected by the terminal included in the corresponding PCell in the above time unit;
  • the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID is the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID among all the CORESETs that need to be detected by the terminal included in the serving cell corresponding to the PDSCH in the above time unit;
  • the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID is the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID among all the CORESETs that need to be detected by the terminal included in the serving cell in which the DCI corresponding to the PDSCH is scheduled in the above time unit;
  • the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID is the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID of all the CORESETs that the terminal included in the serving cell included in the serving cell in which the predetermined CC (such as the CC of the lowest CCID) is located;
  • the above CORESET having the lowest CORESET ID is the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID among all the CORESETs that the terminal included in the predetermined CC group in the above-mentioned time unit needs to detect.
  • the base station configures a COCRESET for the terminal.
  • the QCL parameter base station of the CORESET notifies the terminal by signaling, when the terminal needs to detect the beam recovery response signal (such as the terminal).
  • the terminal After transmitting the beam recovery request signal to the base station, the terminal detects the beam recovery response signal of the base station on the CORESET.
  • the predetermined time window is exceeded, the beam recovery response signal sent by the base station is not successfully detected, and the terminal stops at this.
  • the beam recovery request signal is detected on the CORESET.
  • the QCL parameter of the CORESET is acquired according to the beam found by the terminal in the beam recovery request signal sent by the terminal. As shown in FIG.
  • the QCL parameter of the CORESET1 is obtained by the signaling information notified by the base station, and in the T2 time period, the terminal starts detecting the beam recovery request response signal sent by the base station on the CORESET1, and the QCL parameter of the CORESET1 is based on
  • the reference signal indication information q new included in the beam recovery request signal sent by the terminal is obtained, where q new represents the reference signal indication information selected by the terminal in a reference signal set (that is, the newly selected beam of the terminal), during the T3 time period.
  • the QCL parameter of the CORESET1 is obtained by the signaling information sent by the base station, wherein the signaling information about the QCL parameter of the CORESET1 sent by the base station to the terminal in the T1 time period and the T3 time period may be different signaling information, that is, the base station may be in The T2 time period updates the QCL parameters of CORESET1 through signaling information.
  • the new beam discovered by the terminal in the beam recovery request signal sent by the terminal is obtained by using the reference signal indication information sent by the terminal, where the reference signal indication information indicates the reference signal selected by the terminal in a reference signal set.
  • the reference signal comprises at least one of a measurement reference signal and a synchronization reference signal.
  • the physical layer dynamic control signaling for scheduling the aperiodic measurement reference signal may be after the aperiodic measurement reference signal.
  • the aperiodic measurement reference signal and the physical dynamic control signaling are in the same time unit.
  • the initial time domain symbol in which the DCI of the aperiodic measurement reference signal is located is after the aperiodic measurement reference signal
  • the partial time domain symbol in which the DCI of the aperiodic measurement reference signal is scheduled is in the non-periodic measurement reference.
  • the CSI-RS is on the first time domain symbol where the DCI is located.
  • the TCI indication information is used to indicate a QCL relationship between a DMRS group/CSI-RS port group and a DL-RS set, that is, one TCI index information corresponds to one state, and one state includes Q Correspondence between the DMRS group and the Q DL-RS sets, one DL-RS set includes one or more DL-RSs, and each DL-RS is associated with a QCL parameter set, indicating the DMRS group/CSI-RS port A reference signal in the group and one of the DL-RS sets associated therewith satisfy a QCL (quasi-co-location quasi-co-location) relationship with respect to the QCL parameter set.
  • the two reference signals satisfy a quasi co-location relationship with respect to a QCL parameter, and the QCL parameter indicating a reference signal can be obtained by the QCL parameter of two reference signals, wherein the QCL parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
  • Doppler shift Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, average gain, and spatial Rx parameter.
  • the two reference signals are representations of QCL.
  • the two reference signals are QCL at least with respect to the spatial domain receiving parameters, and the two reference signals are not limited with respect to other QCL parameters.
  • the channel may also be a signal that transmits signals on the channel. For example, transmitting data signals on a data channel.
  • different CCs may be associated by different Serving cell IDs.
  • the terminal does not wish to receive a configuration that satisfies the following characteristics, and the PDSCH and CSI-RS on the same time symbol do not satisfy the QCL relationship with respect to the reception space parameter.
  • an interval between the PDSCH and the control signaling of the scheduling PDSCH is less than a predetermined threshold K.
  • the method according to the above embodiment can be implemented by means of software plus a necessary general hardware platform, and of course, by hardware, but in many cases, the former is A better implementation.
  • the technical solution of the present application which is essential or contributes to the related art, may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium (such as ROM/RAM, disk, CD-ROM).
  • the instructions include a number of instructions for causing a terminal device (which may be a cell phone, a computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform the methods described in various embodiments of the present application.
  • a control device is also provided, which is used to implement the above-mentioned embodiments and preferred embodiments, and has not been described again.
  • the term "module” may implement a combination of at least one of software and hardware for a predetermined function.
  • the apparatus described in the following embodiments is preferably implemented in software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware, is also possible and contemplated.
  • FIG. 11 is a structural block diagram of a device for transmitting control signaling according to an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a first communication node. As shown in FIG. 11, the device includes: a first determining module 112 and a first sending module 114.
  • the first determining module 112 is configured to determine the second information according to the first information.
  • the second information includes at least one of the following: a number N of bits used in the first control signaling to notify the first transmission parameter, an index value referenced by the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling, and the first transmission. a corresponding mapping table between the values of the parameters, a type of the first transmission parameter notified by the predetermined indication field in the first control signaling, and location information of the bit used to notify the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling;
  • the first information includes: a relationship between a transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and a predetermined threshold K, where N and K are non-negative integers.
  • the first sending module 114 is configured to send the first control signaling.
  • the second information includes at least one of the following: a number N of bits used in the first control signaling to notify the first transmission parameter, the first control signal Corresponding mapping table between the index value referenced by the first transmission parameter and the value of the first transmission parameter, the type of the first transmission parameter notified by the predetermined indication field in the first control signaling, and the first control letter And instructing to notify the location information of the bit used by the first transmission parameter;
  • the first information includes: a relationship between a transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and a predetermined threshold K, where N and K are Non-negative integer; the first control signaling is sent.
  • the format of the control signaling is determined by the second information, and then the new control signaling is sent, which overcomes the difficulty in the resource utilization caused by the vacancy of some resources in the related control signaling in the related art.
  • the technical effect of improving the utilization of control signaling resources is to say, the format of the control signaling is determined by the second information, and then the new control signaling is sent, which overcomes the difficulty in the resource utilization caused by the vacancy of some resources in the related control signaling in the related art.
  • the value of the N when the relationship between the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is the first relationship, the value of the N includes N1; When the relationship between the transmission time interval between the signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is the second relationship, the value of the above N includes N2; wherein N1 and N2 are integers.
  • the relationship between the N1 and the N2 is at least one of the following: the N1 is greater than the N2; the difference between the N1 and the N2 is less than or equal to the number of bits occupied by the Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) field. The difference between the above N1 and the above N2 is less than or equal to the number of bits required to notify the second transmission parameter information.
  • TCI Transmission Configuration Indication
  • the corresponding mapping table when the relationship between the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is the first relationship, the corresponding mapping table is a first corresponding mapping table; When the relationship between the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is the second relationship, the corresponding mapping table is the second corresponding mapping table.
  • any one of the first corresponding mapping table, the second corresponding mapping table, the transmission parameter value set 1 and the transmission parameter value set 2 is determined by at least one of the following manners: mode one, sending The content included in the signaling information; the second method: the pre-agreed rules of the sending end and the receiving end; wherein the set of the transmission parameter values corresponds to the set of values of the first transmission parameter included in the first corresponding mapping table
  • the transmission parameter value set 2 corresponds to the value set of the first transmission parameter included in the second corresponding mapping table.
  • a downlink reference signal (DL-RS) of the associated spatial reception parameter in each state in the first corresponding mapping table is configured.
  • the DL-RS set includes only one DL-RS; when the first transmission parameter type is TCI, the DL consists of the downlink reference signal DL-RS of the associated spatial reception parameter in each state in the first corresponding mapping table.
  • the spatial reception parameters between the DL-RSs in the RS set meet the quasi co-location (QCL) relationship.
  • the DL-RS in the DL-RS set formed by the downlink reference signal DL-RS of the associated spatial reception parameter in each state in the first corresponding mapping table can be used by the first communication.
  • the DL-RS set formed by the downlink reference signal DL-RS of the associated spatial receiving parameter in each state in the foregoing first corresponding mapping table is an empty set, where the first transmission parameter type is TCI;
  • the first communication node is a communication node that receives at least one of the first signal and the first control signaling.
  • the type of the first transmission parameter is one or more transmission parameter types except the TCI transmission parameter type included in the foregoing first control signaling; or the first transmission parameter type is TCI transmission. parameter.
  • the first transmission parameter satisfies at least one of the following: the first transmission parameter is a transmission parameter of the first signal; and the first transmission parameter is a transmission parameter of the second signal.
  • the first signal or the second signal includes at least one of a demodulation reference signal, a measurement reference signal, a control channel signal, and a data channel signal; the first control signaling is physical layer control. Signaling.
  • the first information further includes at least one of the following information: information included in the second control signaling; and a transmission configuration corresponding to the control resource set (CORESET) where the first control signaling is located Whether the transmission configuration indication (TCI-PresentInDCI) is enabled; the relationship between the carrier frequency of the first signal or the second signal and the predetermined threshold G; the supported frequency range capability fed back by the first communication node; Whether the preset threshold K is 0; whether there is at least one CORESET configured with a spatial receiving parameter in the CORESET that the first communication node needs to detect; and whether at least one of the CORESET sets associated with the first communication node that needs to detect the dedicated search space exists a CORESET configured with a spatial receiving parameter; whether the CORESET having the lowest control resource set identity (CORESETID) in the time unit closest to the first signal or the second signal is configured with a CORESET of a spatial receiving parameter; The first signal or the second Whether the CORESET having the lowest CORESETID among the nearest
  • the first indication signaling is notified by the predetermined indication field.
  • the type of the first transmission parameter is a first type of transmission parameter; when the relationship between the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is a second relationship, the second control signal.
  • the type of the first transmission parameter that is notified by the predetermined indication field is a second type of transmission parameter.
  • the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal is less than the predetermined threshold K
  • the transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal is a predetermined threshold
  • the relationship between K is the first relationship, and the transmission between the first control signaling and the first signal when the transmission time interval between the control signaling and the first signal is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold K
  • the relationship between the time interval and the predetermined threshold K is the foregoing second relationship; or, when the transmission time interval between the control signaling and the first signal is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold K, the first control signaling and The relationship between the transmission time interval between the first signals and the predetermined threshold K is the first relationship, and the first control is performed when the transmission time interval between the control signaling and the first signal is greater than the predetermined threshold K
  • the relationship between the transmission time interval between the signaling and the first signal and the predetermined threshold K is the foregoing second relationship; or, in the above control signaling and the first signal When the transmission time interval is greater than or equal to the
  • FIG. 12 is a structural block diagram of a receiving device for controlling signaling according to an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a second communications node, as shown in FIG.
  • the device includes a second determining module 122 and a receiving module 124.
  • the second determining module 122 is configured to determine the second information according to the first information.
  • the receiving module 124 is configured to receive the first control signaling according to the second information.
  • the second information is the information determined according to the first information, where the second information includes at least one of the following: the number of bits used in the first control signaling to notify the first transmission parameter, N, the first control signaling. a mapping table between the index value referenced by the first transmission parameter and the value of the first transmission parameter, a type of the first transmission parameter notified by the predetermined indication field in the first control signaling, and a first control signaling And notifying the location information of the bit used by the first transmission parameter; the first information includes: a relationship between a transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and a predetermined threshold K, where N and K are non- Negative integer.
  • each of the above modules may be implemented by software or hardware.
  • the foregoing may be implemented by, but not limited to, the foregoing modules are all located in the same processor; or, the above modules are in any combination.
  • the forms are located in different processors.
  • a device for determining information is provided, which is used to implement the above-mentioned embodiments and preferred embodiments, and details have been omitted for description.
  • the term "module” may implement a combination of at least one of software and hardware for a predetermined function.
  • the apparatus described in the following embodiments is preferably implemented in software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware, is also possible and contemplated.
  • FIG. 13 is a structural block diagram of an apparatus for determining information according to an embodiment of the present application, applied to a first communication node. As shown in FIG. 13, the apparatus includes: a third determining module 132.
  • the third determining module 132 is configured to determine the second information according to the first information.
  • the second information includes at least one of the following: a quasi-co-located QCL parameter of the first signal; a transmission mode of the first signal in a time domain position where the second signal is located; and a first signal in a time domain position where the second signal is located Receiving mode; wherein the first information comprises at least one of the following: whether the second signal exists in a predetermined time window after the specific control resource set CORESET, and the interval between the first signal and the specific CORESET is equal to a predetermined threshold X1
  • the relationship between the time interval between the second signal and the specific CORESET and the predetermined threshold X2 the relationship between the time interval between the first signal and the first control signaling and the predetermined threshold X1, a relationship between a time interval between the second signal and the second control signaling and a predetermined threshold X2, a relationship between the first spatial receiving parameter corresponding to the first signal and the second spatial receiving parameter corresponding to the second signal, wherein X1 and X2 are real numbers.
  • the specific CORESET satisfies at least one of the following characteristics: the CORESET is a CORESET having the lowest control resource set identifier CORESET ID in the time domain symbol closest to the first signal; the CORESET is the closest to the first signal.
  • All of the carrier units CC have a CORESET with a lowest CORESETID; the CORESET is a CORESET having a lowest CORESETID among predetermined CCs in a time unit closest to at least one of the first signal and the second signal; the CORESET is a distance from the above At least one of the first signal and the second signal One of the predetermined CC groups in the most recent time unit having the lowest CORESETID; the CORESET is a CORESET in a predetermined M time domain symbols in a time unit, where M is less than or equal to the time domain symbol included in the time unit Number.
  • the QCL parameter of the first signal is obtained according to the QCL parameter of the CORESET; in the first signal and the CORESET
  • the QCL parameter of the first signal is obtained by the QCL parameter configured in the configuration information of the first signal.
  • the QCL parameter of the first signal when the interval between the first signal and the CORESET is less than the predetermined threshold X1, the QCL parameter of the first signal has a higher priority than the QCL parameter of the second signal; When the interval between the CORESETs is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold X1, the QCL parameter of the first signal has a lower priority than the QCL parameter of the second signal.
  • a frequency division multiplexing manner is not allowed between the first signal and the second signal;
  • the interval between the signal and the CORESET is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold X1, the first signal and the second signal are allowed to adopt frequency division multiplexing.
  • At least one of the first signal and the second signal includes at least one of a downlink measurement reference signal, a downlink synchronization signal, a downlink demodulation reference signal, a downlink data channel signal, and a downlink control. Channel signal.
  • the predetermined threshold X1 is equal to the predetermined threshold X2; and/or the QCL parameter of the second signal is based on an interval between the control information for scheduling the second signal and the second signal and the predetermined threshold X2 The relationship between the two is determined.
  • the first signal satisfies at least one of the following features: the first signal is a downlink signal scheduled by a physical layer dynamic control signaling; the first signal is a downlink physical control channel signal; and the first signal is scheduled.
  • the interval between the control signaling and the first signal is less than the predetermined threshold X1 described above.
  • the second signal satisfies at least one of the following: a control signaling for scheduling the second signal is before a time domain symbol where the first signal is located; a control signaling for scheduling the second signal, and the foregoing The interval between the time domain symbols in which the signal is located is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold X3; the interval between the control signaling for scheduling the second signal and the initial time domain symbol of the second signal is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold X3; the second signal is a downlink signal of physical layer dynamic control signaling scheduling; the second signal is a periodic downlink measurement reference signal; wherein X3 is a real number.
  • the QCL parameter of the first signal is determined according to the QCL parameter of the second signal; and the foregoing time does not exist in the predetermined time window after the CORESET
  • the QCL parameter of the first signal is not determined according to the QCL parameter of the second signal; and/or the second signal is present in a predetermined time window after the CORESET, the first signal and the scheduling of the first signal
  • the QCL parameter of the first signal is not obtained according to the QCL parameter of the CORESET; the second signal is not present in the predetermined time window after the CORESET, the first signal and
  • the QCL parameter of the first signal is acquired according to the QCL parameter of the CORESET.
  • a spatial reception parameter of the second signal is different from a spatial reception parameter of the first signal; and spatial reception of the second signal
  • the spatial filter corresponding to the parameter and the spatial filter corresponding to the spatial receiving parameter of the first signal cannot be simultaneously played at the first communication node; the second signal and the first signal belong to different CCs; when the first signal is located The intersection between the domain location and the time domain location where the second signal is located is a non-empty set; the first signal and the second signal are in the same time domain position; the second signal has a higher priority than the first The priority of the signal.
  • the determining the second information according to the first information includes: determining, according to the first information, at least one of the following information: the first a priority between the signal and the QCL parameter of the second signal; a priority between the QCL parameter configured in the configuration information of the first signal and the QCL parameter of the specific CORESET; when the first signal and the first signal are scheduled Whether the QCL parameter of the first signal is obtained according to the QCL parameter of the specific CORESET when the interval between the control signaling is less than the predetermined threshold X1 described above.
  • the determining the second information according to the first information includes determining at least one of the following information according to the first information. Whether the first signal is received at a time domain position where the second signal is located; whether a control channel is detected at a time domain position where the second signal is located; and at the time domain position where the second signal is located, the first a priority between a QCL parameter of the signal and a QCL parameter of the second signal; whether the first signal and the second signal are frequency division multiplexed; whether the first signal can include a second time domain position The time domain location where the signal is located.
  • the determining the second information according to the first information includes determining at least one of the following information according to the first information. Whether the first signal is sent in the time domain position where the second signal is located; whether the control channel is transmitted in the time domain position where the second signal is located; and the first time in the time domain position where the second signal is located a priority between a QCL parameter of the signal and a QCL parameter of the second signal; whether the first signal and the second signal are frequency division multiplexed; whether the first signal can include a second time domain position The time domain location where the signal is located.
  • the time domain location where the second signal is located includes one of the following time domain locations: a time domain symbol in which the second signal is located; and a time unit in which the second signal is located.
  • the method further includes: not receiving a configuration that is configured to: when an interval between the first control signaling and the first signal that schedules the first signal is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold X1, scheduling When the interval between the second control signaling of the second signal and the second signal is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold X2, the first signal and the second signal do not satisfy the QCL relationship with respect to the spatial receiving parameter; The interval between the first control signaling of the first signal and the first signal is less than the predetermined threshold X1, and the interval between the second control signaling and the second signal for scheduling the second signal is greater than or equal to the foregoing
  • the threshold X2 is predetermined, the QCL parameter of the first signal is determined according to the QCL parameter of the second signal; when the interval between the first control signaling and the first signal for scheduling the first signal is less than the predetermined threshold X1, When the interval between the second control signaling and the second signal of the second signal is less than the predetermined threshold X2, the foregoing The priority of the QCL parameter
  • the first information further includes at least one of the following: whether the control signaling included in the specific CORESET includes a transmission configuration indication TCI indication field; and at least one of the first signal and the second signal. a relationship between a carrier frequency and a predetermined threshold G; whether at least one of the preset threshold X1 and the predetermined threshold X2 is 0; whether there is at least one CORESET configured with a spatial receiving parameter in the specific CORESET; Whether there is at least one CORESET configured with a spatial receiving parameter in the CORESET set that the communication node needs to detect; whether there is at least one TCI state in the TCI state pool associated with the first signal or the second signal, wherein the TCI state is in the above TCI state
  • the QCL parameter corresponding to the reference signal set includes a spatial receiving parameter; whether there is at least one TCI state in the activated TCI state pool associated with the first signal or the second signal, and the QCL corresponding to the reference signal set in the TCI state
  • the parameter includes a spatial receiving parameter
  • the determining the second information according to the first information includes the following At least one of the modes: when the first signal and the second signal satisfy a QCL relationship with respect to a spatial receiving parameter, the time domain symbol in which the first signal is available includes a time domain symbol in which the second signal is located; the first signal and the foregoing When the second signal does not satisfy the QCL relationship with respect to the spatial receiving parameter, the time domain symbol in which the first signal can be included does not include the time domain symbol in which the second signal is located; the spatial filter corresponding to the first spatial receiving parameter and the foregoing When the first communication node corresponding to the spatial receiving parameter of the second spatial receiving parameter can be simultaneously generated, the time domain symbol in which the first signal can be included includes the time domain symbol in which the second signal is located; and the spatial filtering corresponding to the receiving parameter in the first space When the first communication node of the spatial filter corresponding to
  • time domain symbol in which the first signal may be in the time domain symbol does not include the time domain symbol in which the second signal is located may be in the time domain symbol position where the second signal is located, and the first signal is not transmitted and/or not received.
  • a signal is used for rate matching.
  • the first information is a relationship between a time interval between the first signal and the first control signaling and a predetermined threshold X1
  • the second information is a quasi-co-located QCL parameter of the first signal. Determining, according to the first information, that the second information includes at least one of the following: the first signal is on a different time domain symbol of a time unit, and the QCL parameter remains unchanged; the first signal is on a different time unit, The QCL parameter may be different; there is a correspondence between the QCL parameter and the A time units of the first signal B1; the QCL parameter of the first signal in each of the A time units in which the first signal is located Obtaining according to a QCL parameter of a CORESET having a predetermined feature in a time unit closest to the time unit; and in the A time units in which the first signal is located, according to the first signal and the first control signaling in each time unit Determining a QCL parameter of the first signal in the time unit according to a relationship between the time interval and the
  • time unit may be one time slot, one subframe, or other time units.
  • the first information is a relationship between a time interval between the first signal and the first control signaling and a predetermined threshold X1
  • the second information is a quasi-co-located QCL parameter of the first signal. Determining, according to the first information, that the second information includes at least one of: a time interval between the first signal and the first control signaling in a foremost one of the A time units and the predetermined threshold a relationship between X1, determining a QCL parameter of the first signal, wherein the QCL parameter of the first signal in the A time units remains unchanged; each time unit in the A1 time unit in which the first signal is located
  • the QCL parameter of the first signal in the first signal is obtained according to a QCL parameter of a CORESET having a predetermined feature in a time unit closest to the time unit, wherein the first signal in the last time unit of the A1 time units and the foregoing An interval between control signaling is less than the predetermined threshold X1; the QCL parameter of the first signal remains unchanged in the A2 time
  • each of the above modules may be implemented by software or hardware.
  • the foregoing may be implemented by, but not limited to, the foregoing modules are all located in the same processor; or, the above modules are in any combination.
  • the forms are located in different processors.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a storage medium having stored therein a computer program, wherein the computer program is configured to execute the steps of any one of the method embodiments described above.
  • the above storage medium may be arranged to store a computer program for performing the following steps S1 and S2.
  • step S1 the second information is determined based on the first information.
  • the second information includes at least one of the following: a number N of bits used to notify the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling, an index value referenced by the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling, and the first a mapping table between the values of a transmission parameter, a type of the first transmission parameter notified by the predetermined indication field in the first control signaling, and a location information of the bit used to notify the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling
  • the first information includes: a relationship between a transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and a predetermined threshold K, where N and K are non-negative integers.
  • step S2 the first control signaling is sent.
  • the storage medium is further arranged to store a computer program for performing the following step S1.
  • the second information is determined according to the first information; wherein the second information comprises at least one of: a quasi-co-location QCL parameter of the first signal; and a first signal at a time domain location where the second signal is located a sending mode; a receiving manner of the first signal in a time domain position where the second signal is located; wherein the first information includes at least one of the following information: whether the second signal exists in a predetermined time window after the specific control resource set CORESET a relationship between an interval between the first signal and a specific CORESET and a predetermined threshold X1, a relationship between a time interval between the second signal and a specific CORESET and a predetermined threshold X2, the first signal sum a relationship between a time interval between the first control signaling and a predetermined threshold X1, a relationship between a time interval between the second signal and the second control signaling and a predetermined threshold X2, corresponding to the first signal A relationship between a spatial receiving parameter and a second spatial receiving parameter corresponding to the second signal,
  • the storage medium is further arranged to store a computer program for performing the following steps S1 and S2.
  • step S1 the second information is determined based on the first information.
  • the first control signaling is received according to the second information, where the second information includes at least one of the following: a number of bits used in the first control signaling to notify the first transmission parameter, a corresponding mapping table between the index value referenced by the first transmission parameter and the value of the first transmission parameter in a control signaling, a type of the first transmission parameter notified by the predetermined indication field in the first control signaling, And notifying, in the first control signaling, location information of a bit used by the first transmission parameter; the first information includes: between a transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and a predetermined threshold K Relationship, N, K are non-negative integers.
  • the foregoing storage medium may include, but is not limited to, a USB flash drive, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), and a mobile hard disk.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • RAM random access memory
  • mobile hard disk A variety of media that can store computer programs, such as a magnetic disk or an optical disk.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide an electronic device including a memory and a processor having a computer program stored therein, the processor being configured to execute a computer program to perform the steps of any of the above method embodiments.
  • the electronic device may further include a transmission device and an input and output device, wherein the transmission device is connected to the processor, and the input and output device is connected to the processor.
  • the above processor may be arranged to perform the following steps S1 and S2 by a computer program.
  • the second information is determined based on the first information.
  • the second information includes at least one of the following: a number N of bits used to notify the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling, an index value referenced by the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling, and the first a mapping table between the values of a transmission parameter, a type of the first transmission parameter notified by the predetermined indication field in the first control signaling, and a location information of the bit used to notify the first transmission parameter in the first control signaling
  • the first information includes: a relationship between a transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and a predetermined threshold K, where N and K are non-negative integers.
  • step S2 the first control signaling is sent.
  • the processor is further arranged to store a computer program for performing the following step S1:
  • the second information is determined according to the first information; wherein the second information comprises at least one of: a quasi-co-location QCL parameter of the first signal; and a first signal at a time domain location where the second signal is located a sending mode; a receiving manner of the first signal in a time domain position where the second signal is located; wherein the first information includes at least one of the following information: whether the second signal exists in a predetermined time window after the specific control resource set CORESET a relationship between an interval between the first signal and a specific CORESET and a predetermined threshold X1, a relationship between a time interval between the second signal and a specific CORESET and a predetermined threshold X2, the first signal sum a relationship between a time interval between the first control signaling and a predetermined threshold X1, a relationship between a time interval between the second signal and the second control signaling and a predetermined threshold X2, corresponding to the first signal A relationship between a spatial receiving parameter and a second spatial receiving parameter corresponding to the second signal,
  • the electronic device is further arranged to store a computer program for performing the following steps S1 and S2.
  • step S1 the second information is determined based on the first information.
  • the first control signaling is received according to the second information, where the second information includes at least one of the following: a number of bits used in the first control signaling to notify the first transmission parameter, a corresponding mapping table between the index value referenced by the first transmission parameter and the value of the first transmission parameter in a control signaling, a type of the first transmission parameter notified by the predetermined indication field in the first control signaling, And notifying, in the first control signaling, location information of a bit used by the first transmission parameter; the first information includes: between a transmission time interval between the first control signaling and the first signal and a predetermined threshold K Relationship, N, K are non-negative integers.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a method for determining a quasi co-located reference signal, as shown in FIG. 14, including at least one of the following steps S1401 and S1402:
  • step S1401 when the number of time units A occupied by one signal is greater than 1, the quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal is determined according to at least one of the signaling information and the predetermined rule.
  • step S1402 at least the spatial reception parameter satisfies a quasi co-location relationship between the N signals at the same time, where N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the one signal comprises any one of the following: a data channel signal, a control channel signal, or a reference signal.
  • the determining the quasi co-location parameter of the one signal comprises: acquiring a quasi co-location reference signal, and acquiring a quasi co-location parameter according to the quasi co-location reference signal.
  • the spatial reception parameter satisfies the quasi co-location relationship between the N signals at the same time represents at least one of the following: the communication node does not wish to receive the spatial reception parameter between the N signals at the same time.
  • the one signal is a signal that is scheduled to occupy A time units in the control signaling, and the one signal may be a repeated transmission or a non-repetitive transmission in the A time units.
  • the at least one spatially received filtering parameter satisfies a quasi co-location relationship between the N signals at the same time, including at least one of the following: the N signals include lower signals in different CCs;
  • the N signals include at least two of the following signals: a data channel signal, a control channel signal, a downlink measurement reference signal, and a demodulation reference signal.
  • the quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal is determined according to at least one of signaling information and a predetermined rule, including at least the following a: the one signal is on different time domain symbols of a time unit, the quasi co-location reference signal remains unchanged; the one signal is different on different time units, and the quasi co-location reference signal may be different; There is a correspondence between a signal B1 register co-location reference signal and A time units; a quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal in each of the A time units in which the one signal is located is based on Obtaining a quasi-co-located reference signal of a CORESET having a predetermined characteristic in a time unit closest to the time unit; in each of the A time units in which the one signal is located, according to the one of the signals in the time unit Determining a quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal in the time unit with a relationship between a time interval between control
  • the quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal is determined according to at least one of signaling information and a predetermined rule, including at least the following One:
  • the quasi-commonness of the one signal based on a relationship between a time interval between the one of the first one of the A time units and the control signaling for scheduling the one signal and a predetermined threshold X1 Address reference signal, the quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal in the A time units remains unchanged;
  • a quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal of each of the A1 time units in which the one signal is located is obtained from a quasi-co-located reference signal of a CORESET having a predetermined characteristic in a time unit closest to the time unit
  • the interval between the one of the last one of the A1 time units and the control signaling for scheduling the one signal is less than a predetermined threshold X1;
  • the quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal remains unchanged in the A2 time units in which the one signal is located;
  • A1 are non-negative integers less than or equal to the A value
  • B2 is a non-negative integer less than or equal to A2.
  • the quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal is determined according to at least one of signaling information and a predetermined rule, including: When the time interval between a signal and the control signaling for scheduling the one signal is less than a predetermined threshold X1, the quasi-co-located reference signal of the control channel resource satisfying the predetermined feature in the time unit closest to the one signal is obtained.
  • a quasi-co-located reference signal of a signal, wherein a time interval between the one signal and control signaling for scheduling the one signal comprises one of the following:
  • the quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal is obtained according to a quasi co-location reference signal of a control channel resource that satisfies a predetermined feature in a time unit closest to the one signal, including one of the following:
  • the A1 time units are the A time units occupied by the one signal, or the one signal in each time unit of the A1 time units and control signaling for scheduling the one signal
  • the time interval between is less than a predetermined threshold X1.
  • the quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal is determined according to at least one of signaling information and a predetermined rule, including at least the following One:
  • the B2 register co-location reference signal of the one signal corresponds to the polling manner in the A2 time units
  • the control signaling for scheduling the one signal includes B3 relationships, where the one relationship corresponds to a set of time units in the A time units, and the one relationship includes a relationship between Z DMRS groups and Z RS Sets.
  • Z is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the B2 register co-location reference signal is included in the control signaling for scheduling the one signal, or the B4 set in the B2 register co-location reference signal is included in the control signaling for scheduling the one signal,
  • the B5 set in the B2 register co-location reference signal is included in the high layer signaling, where the B2 and the B3 are non-negative integers less than or equal to A2;
  • the time interval between the one of the A2 time units and the control signaling for scheduling the one signal is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold X1, or the A2 time units The A time units occupied by the one signal.
  • the TCI is used to notify the quasi-co-located reference signal of the signal, and the QCL parameter of the signal is obtained according to the quasi-co-located reference signal of the signal.
  • the set of quasi-co-located reference signals includes at least one RS set reference signal set, and a QCL relationship exists between each RS set and one DMRS group.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a determining device for a quasi co-located reference signal, including at least one of the following modules:
  • the signal determining module 152 is configured to determine a quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal according to at least one of signaling information and a predetermined rule when the number of time units A occupied by one signal is greater than one.
  • the relationship satisfaction module 154 sets the pseudo-co-location relationship with respect to the spatial reception parameter between the N signals set at the same time, where N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the relationship satisfaction module 154 is further configured to: downlink signals in different CCs; at least two of the following signals: a data channel signal, a control channel signal, a downlink measurement reference signal, and a demodulation reference signal .
  • the signal determining module 152 is further configured to: at least one of: the one signal is on a different time domain symbol of a time unit, the quasi-co-located reference signal remains unchanged; the one signal
  • the quasi-co-located reference signals may be different on different time units; there is a correspondence between the B1 register co-location reference signal and the A time units of the one signal; and A time units in which the one signal is located
  • the quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal in each of the time units is obtained according to a quasi-co-located reference signal of a CORESET having a predetermined characteristic in a time unit closest to the time unit; at the A where the one signal is located Determining, in each time unit in the time unit, the one signal in the time unit according to a relationship between a time interval between the one signal in the time unit and control signaling for scheduling a signal and a predetermined threshold X1 Quasi-co-located reference signal; where B1 is a non-negative integer less than or equal to
  • the signal determining module 152 is further configured to be at least one of the following:
  • the quasi-commonness of the one signal based on a relationship between a time interval between the one of the first one of the A time units and the control signaling for scheduling the one signal and a predetermined threshold X1 Address reference signal, the quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal in the A time units remains unchanged;
  • a quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal of each of the A1 time units in which the one signal is located is obtained from a quasi-co-located reference signal of a CORESET having a predetermined characteristic in a time unit closest to the time unit
  • the interval between the one of the last one of the A1 time units and the control signaling for scheduling the one signal is less than a predetermined threshold X1;
  • the quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal remains unchanged in the A2 time units in which the one signal is located;
  • the quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal in the A2 time units is determined according to information notified in scheduling control signaling of the first signal, wherein in the foremost time unit of the A2 time units The interval between the one signal and the control signaling is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold X1;
  • A1 are non-negative integers less than or equal to A
  • B2 is a non-negative integer less than or equal to A2.
  • the signal determining module 152 is further configured to: when the time interval between the one signal and the control signaling for scheduling the one signal is less than a predetermined threshold X1, according to a time unit closest to the one signal Obtaining a quasi-co-located reference signal of the control signal resource that satisfies a predetermined characteristic, wherein a time interval between the one signal and control signaling for scheduling the one signal includes one of the following :
  • the quasi-co-located reference signal of the one signal is obtained according to a quasi co-location reference signal of a control channel resource that satisfies a predetermined feature in a time unit closest to the one signal, including one of the following:
  • the A1 time units are the A time units occupied by the one signal, or the one signal in each time unit of the A1 time units and control signaling for scheduling the one signal
  • the time interval between is less than a predetermined threshold X1.
  • the signal determination module 152 is configured to be at least one of the following:
  • the B2 register co-location reference signal of the one signal corresponds to the polling manner in the A2 time units
  • the control signaling for scheduling the one signal includes B3 relationships, where the one relationship corresponds to a set of time units in the A time units, and the one relationship includes a relationship between Z DMRS groups and Z RS Sets.
  • Z is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the B2 register co-location reference signal is included in the control signaling for scheduling the one signal, or the B4 set in the B2 register co-location reference signal is included in the control signaling for scheduling the one signal,
  • the B5 set in the B2 register co-location reference signal is included in the high layer signaling.
  • B2 and B3 are non-negative integers less than or equal to the A2;
  • the time interval between the one of the A2 time units and the control signaling for scheduling the one signal is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold X1, or the A2 time units The A time units occupied by the one signal.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a storage medium having stored therein a computer program, wherein the computer program is configured to execute the steps of any one of the method embodiments described above.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide an electronic device including a memory and a processor having a computer program stored therein, the processor being configured to execute a computer program to perform the steps of any of the above method embodiments.
  • modules or steps of the present application can be implemented by a general computing device, which can be concentrated on a single computing device or distributed in a network composed of multiple computing devices.
  • they may be implemented by program code executable by a computing device such that they may be stored in a storage device for execution by the computing device and, in some cases, may be different from
  • the steps shown or described are performed sequentially, or they are separately fabricated into individual integrated circuit modules, or a plurality of modules or steps thereof are fabricated into a single integrated circuit module.
  • the application is not limited to any particular combination of hardware and software.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Quality & Reliability (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Two-Way Televisions, Distribution Of Moving Picture Or The Like (AREA)

Abstract

公开了一种控制信令的发送、接收以及信息的确定方法及装置。其中包括：根据第一信息确定第二信息；其中，该第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和该第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；该第一信息包括：该第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数；发送该第一控制信令。

Description

控制信令的发送、控制信令的接收以及信息的确定方法及装置
本申请要求在2018年02月26日提交中国专利局、申请号为201810160248.2的中国专利申请的优先权，该申请的全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，例如涉及一种控制信令的发送、接收以及信息的确定方法及装置。
背景技术
高频通信作为第五代的蜂窝移动通信(5th Generation Wireless Systems，5G)的核心技术之一，为未来通信的高速率大带宽提供有力支持，但是高频通信的一个核心问题是路径损耗比较大，同时考虑到天线尺寸比较小，可以采用多天线形成波束，抵抗路径损耗。
为了提高系统效率，抵抗波束阻挡场景，快速链路恢复，下行信号的波束可以通过物理层动态控制信令通知，当控制信令和下行信号之间的间隔小于预定门限时，终端不能通过物理层动态控制信令通知的信息获取下行信号的接收波束。
相关新空口(New Radio，NR)协议中，当物理层动态控制信令和下行信号之间的间隔小于预定门限时，采用最近时隙(slot)中具有最低控制资源集合标识(Control Resource Set Identification，CORESETID)的控制资源集合(Control Resource Set，CORESET)的波束来缓存数据。
上述方案会存在如下两种情形，第一种情形是当物理层动态控制信令和下行信号之间的间隔小于预定门限时，物理层动态控制信令中通知波束的比特域没有充分利用，第二种情形是，由于在未解码到物理层动态控制信令之前，需要缓存下行信号，但是实际下行信号基站可能没有调度，如果按照规定终端需要按照最近CORESETID的CORESET缓存动态调度的潜在下行信号，且在这些潜在下行信号所在的位置可能还存在之前调度的信号，那么当之前调度的下行信号和潜在下行信号的波束终端不能同时打出时，需要基站和终端约定行为，从而保证通信的有效性。
针对上述技术问题，相关技术中尚未提出有效的解决方案。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供了一种控制信令的发送、接收以及信息的确定方法及装置，以克服相关技术中当物理层动态控制信令和下行信号之间的间隔小于预定门限时，物理层动态控制信令中通知波束的比特域没有充分利用所造成的资源利用率较低的缺陷以及潜在下行信号所在的位置可能还存在之前调度的信号，当之前调度的下行信号和潜在下行信号的波束终端不能同时打出时无法保证通信的有效性的缺陷。
根据本申请的一个实施例，提供了一种控制信令的发送方法，包括：根据第一信息确定第二信息；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和所述第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；所述第一信息包括：所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数；发送所述第一控制信令。在一实施例中，根据所述确定的第二信息发送所述第一控制信令。
根据本申请的另一个实施例，提供了一种信息的确定方法，包括：根据第一信息确定第二信息；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一信号的准共址QCL参数；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的发送方式；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的接收方式；其中，所述第一信息包括以下信息至少之一：特定控制资源集合CORESET之后预定时间窗中是否存在所述第二信号，所述第一信号和特定CORESET之间的间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，所述第二信号和特定CORESET之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，所述第一信号和第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，所述第二信号和第二控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，第一信号对应的第一空间接收参数和第二信号对应的第二空间接收参数之间的关系，其中X1、X2为实数。在一实施例中，根据所述确定的第二信息发送或者接收所述第一信号。
根据本申请的另一个实施例，提供了一种控制信令的接收方法，包括：根据第一信息确定第二信息；根据所述第二信息接收第一控制信令；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和所述第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的 类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；所述第一信息包括：所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数。
根据本申请的另一个实施例，提供了一种准共址参考信号的确定方法，包括以下至少之一：
一个信号占有的时间单元个数A大于1时，根据信令信息和预定规则中的至少之一，确定所述一个信号的准共址参考信号；以及，同一时刻的N个信号之间关于空间接收参数满足准共址关系，其中，N为大于或者等于2的正整数。
根据本申请的另一个实施例，提供了一种控制信令的发送装置，应用于第一通信节点，包括：第一确定模块，设置为根据第一信息确定第二信息；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和所述第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；所述第一信息包括：所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数；第一发送模块，设置为发送所述第一控制信令。在一实施例中，根据所述确定的第二信息发送所述第一控制信令。
根据本申请的另一个实施例，提供了一种信息的确定装置，应用于第一通信节点，包括：第二确定模块，设置为根据第一信息确定第二信息；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一信号的准共址QCL参数；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的发送方式；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的接收方式；其中，所述第一信息包括以下信息至少之一：特定控制资源集合CORESET之后预定时间窗中是否存在所述第二信号，所述第一信号和特定CORESET之间的间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，所述第二信号和特定CORESET之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，所述第一信号和第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，所述第二信号和第二控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，第一信号对应的第一空间接收参数和第二信号对应的第二空间接收参数之间的关系，其中X1、X2为实数。在一实施例中，根据所述确定的第二信息发送或者接收所述第一信号。
根据本申请的另一个实施例，提供了一种控制信令的接收装置，应用于第二通信节点，包括：第三确定模块：根据第一信息确定第二信息；接收模块： 根据所述第二信息接收第一控制信令；其中，所述第二信息为根据第一信息确定的信息；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和所述第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；所述第一信息包括：所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数。
根据本申请的又一个实施例，还提供了一种存储介质，所述存储介质中存储有计算机程序，其中，所述计算机程序被设置为运行时执行上述任一项方法实施例中的步骤。
根据本申请的又一个实施例，还提供了一种电子装置，包括存储器和处理器，所述存储器中存储有计算机程序，所述处理器被设置为运行所述计算机程序以执行上述任一项方法实施例中的步骤。
附图概述
此处所说明的附图用来提供对本申请的进一步理解，构成本申请的一部分，本申请的示意性实施例及其说明用于解释本申请，并不构成对本申请的不当限定。在附图中：
图1是根据本申请实施例的控制信令的发送方法流程示意图；
图1a是根据本申请实施例的PDSCH2的Spatial Rx parameter参数根据PDSCH1的Spatial Rx parameter参数获取的示意图；
图1b是根据本申请实施例的PDSCH的Spatial Rx parameter参数根据CSI-RS的Spatial Rx parameter参数获取的示意图；
图1c是根据本申请实施例的PDSCH的Spatial Rx parameter参数根据距离PDSCH最近的时域符号中的最低CORESETID的CORESET的Spatial Rx parameter参数获取的示意图；
图1d是根据本申请实施例的PDSCH的Spatial Rx parameter参数对应的接收波束和相同时域符号中的CORESET的Spatial Rx parameter参数对应的接收波束不同的示意图一；
图1e是根据本申请实施例的PDSCH的Spatial Rx parameter参数对应的接收波束和相同时域符号中的CORESET的Spatial Rx parameter参数对应的接收波 束不同的示意图二；
图1f是根据本申请实施例的PDSCH的Spatial Rx parameter参数对应的接收波束和相同时域符号中的CORESET的Spatial Rx parameter参数对应的接收波束不同的示意图三；
图2是根据本申请实施例的周期CSI-RS的至少Spatial Rx parameter参数根据周期CSI-RS和距离周期CSI-RS最近的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET之间的距离与预定阈值之间的关系确定的示意图；
图3是根据本申请实施例的周期CSI-RS和PDSCH的至少Spatial Rx parameter参数的优先级根据周期CSI-RS和距离周期CSI-RS最近的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET之间的距离与预定阈值之间的关系确定的示意图；
图4a是根据本申请实施例的一个PDSCH占有多个slot时，各个slot中PDSCH的Spatial Rx parameter参数的获取方式的示意图一；
图4b是根据本申请实施例的一个PDSCH占有多个slot时，各个slot中PDSCH的Spatial Rx parameter参数的获取方式的示意图二；
图4c是根据本申请实施例的一个PDSCH占有多个slot时，各个slot中PDSCH的Spatial Rx parameter参数的获取方式的示意图三；
图4d是根据本申请实施例的一个PDSCH占有多个slot时，各个slot中PDSCH的Spatial Rx parameter参数的获取方式的示意图四；
图4e是根据本申请实施例的一个PDSCH占有多个slot时，各个slot中PDSCH的Spatial Rx parameter参数的获取方式的示意图五；
图4f是根据本申请实施例的一个PDSCH占有多个slot时，各个slot中PDSCH的Spatial Rx parameter参数的获取方式的示意图六；
图5是根据本申请实施例的索引值和传输参数值的对应多个表格对应不同的时域位置的示意图；
图6a是根据本申请实施例的不同CC的两个PDSCH之间是QCL的示意图；
图6b是根据本申请实施例的不同CC的PDSCH和CORESET之间是QCL的示意图；
图6c是根据本申请实施例的不同CC的两个CORESET之间是QCL的示意图；
图6d是根据本申请实施例的不同CC的PDSCH和CSI-RS之间是QCL的示意图；
图7a是根据本申请实施例的属于一个CC的两个PDSCH之间是QCL的示意图；
图7b是根据本申请实施例的属于一个CC的PDSCH和CORESET之间是QCL的示意图；
图7c是根据本申请实施例的属于一个CC的两个CORESET之间是QCL的示意图；
图7d是根据本申请实施例的属于一个CC的PDSCH和CSI-RS之间是QCL的示意图；
图7e是根据本申请实施例的属于一个CC的两个CSI-RS之间是QCL的示意图；
图8a是根据本申请实施例的一个CORESET的QCL参数与终端是否检测波束恢复请求信号有关的示意图；
图8b是根据本申请实施例的调度非周期测量参考信号的DCI在非周期测量参考信号之后的示意图一；
图8c是根据本申请实施例的调度非周期测量参考信号的DCI在非周期测量参考信号之后的示意图二；
图9是根据本申请实施例的控制信令的接收方法流程示意图；
图10是根据本申请实施例的信息的确定方法流程示意图；
图11是根据本申请实施例的控制信令的发送装置的结构示意框图；
图12是根据本申请实施例的控制信令的接收装置的结构示意框图；
图13是根据本申请实施例的信息的确定装置的结构示意框图；
图14是根据本申请实施例的准共址参考信号的确定方法流程示意图；
图15是根据本申请实施例的准共址参考信号的确定装置的结构示意框图。
具体实施方式
下文中将参考附图并结合实施例来详细说明本申请。
需要说明的是，本申请的说明书和权利要求书及上述附图中的术语“第一”、“第二”等是用于区别类似的对象，而不必用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。
实施例1
在本实施例中提供了一种控制信令的发送方法，图1是根据本申请实施例的控制信令的发送方法流程图，如图1所示，该流程包括如下步骤S102和步骤 S104。
在步骤S102中，根据第一信息确定第二信息。
其中，该第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和该第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；该第一信息包括：该第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数。
在步骤S104中，发送该第一控制信令。
在一实施例中，根据该确定的第二信息发送该第一控制信令。
通过上述步骤，根据第一信息确定第二信息；其中，该第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和该第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；该第一信息包括：该第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数；发送该第一控制信令。也就是说，通过第二信息确定控制信令的格式，然后发送新的控制信令，克服了相关技术中当物理层动态控制信令和下行信号之间的间隔小于预定门限时，物理层动态控制信令中通知波束的比特域没有充分利用所造成的资源利用率较低的缺陷，达到了提高控制信令资源利用率的技术效果。
在一实施例中，上述步骤的执行主体可以为基站等，但不限于此。
在一实施例中，步骤S102和步骤S104的执行顺序是可以互换的，即可以先执行步骤S104，然后再执行S102。
在一实施例中，在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系时，上述N的取值包括N1；在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第二关系时，上述N的取值包括N2；其中，N1、N2为整数。
其中，上述N1和上述N2之间的关系满足以下至少之一：上述N1大于上述N2；上述N1与上述N2的差值小于或者等于传输配置指示(Transmission configuration indication，TCI)域所占的比特数；上述N1与上述N2的差值小于 或者等于通知第二传输参数信息所需要的比特数。
在一实施例中，在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系时，上述对应映射表格为第一对应映射表格；在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第二关系时，上述对应映射表格为第二对应映射表格。
在一实施例中，上述第一对应映射表格、上述第二对应映射表格、传输参数取值集合一以及传输参数取值集合二中的任一项通过以下方式至少之一确定：方式一、发送的信令信息所包括的内容；方式二、发送端和接收端预先约定的规则；其中，上述传输参数取值集合一对应上述第一对应映射表格中包括的上述第一传输参数的取值集合，上述传输参数取值集合二对应上述第二对应映射表格中包括的上述第一传输参数的取值集合。
在一个实施方式中，在上述第一传输参数的类型为TCI时，上述第一对应映射表格中每个状态中关联空间接收参数Spatial Rx parameter的下行链路参考信号(Down link reference signal，DL-RS)构成的DL-RS集合中只包括一个DL-RS；在上述第一传输参数类型为TCI时，上述第一对应映射表格中每个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号DL-RS构成的DL-RS集合中DL-RS两两之间关于空间接收参数满足准共址(quasi co-location，QCL)关系。
在上述第一传输参数类型为TCI时，上述第一对应映射表格中每个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号DL-RS构成的DL-RS集合中的DL-RS能被第一通信节点同时接收；在上述第一传输参数类型为TCI时，上述第一对应映射表格中每个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号DL-RS构成的DL-RS集合为空集；其中，上述第一通信节点为接收上述第一信号，和上述第一控制信令中至少之一的通信节点。
在一实施例中，上述第一传输参数的类型为上述第一控制信令中包括的除TCI传输参数类型之外的一个或者多个传输参数类型；或者，上述第一传输参数类型为TCI传输参数。
在一实施例中，上述第一传输参数满足以下至少之一：上述第一传输参数为上述第一信号的传输参数；上述第一传输参数为第二信号的传输参数。
在一实施例中，上述第一信号或者上述第二信号包括以下信号至少之一：解调参考信号、测量参考信号、控制信道信号、以及数据信道信号；上述第一控制信令为物理层控制信令。
在一个实施方式中，上述第一信息还包括以下信息至少之一：第二控制信令中包括的信息；上述第一控制信令所在的控制资源集合(control resource set，CORESET)对应的传输配置指示(transmission configuration indication，TCI-PresentInDCI)是否使能信息；上述第一信号或者上述第二信号所在的载频与预定阈值G之间的关系；第一通信节点反馈的支持的频率范围能力；上述预设阈值K是否为0；第一通信节点需要检测的CORESET中是否至少存在一个配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与上述第一通信节点需要检测专有搜索空间关联的CORESET集合中是否至少存在一个配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与上述第一信号或者上述第二信号距离最近的时间单元中具有最低控制资源集合标识(control resource set identity，CORESETID)的CORESET是否配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与上述第一信号或者上述第二信号距离最近的时域符号中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET是否配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与上述第一信号或者上述第二信号关联的TCI状态池中是否至少存在一个TCI状态，其中，上述TCI状态中与参考信号集合参考结合reference RS set对应的QCL参数中包括空间接收参数；与上述第一信号或者第二信号关联的激活TCI状态池中，是否至少存在一个TCI状态，上述TCI状态中于所述参考信号集合reference RS set对应的QCL参数中包括空间接收参数；其中，上述第一通信节点为接收上述第一信号，和上述第二信号中至少之一的通信节点。
在一实施例中，第一控制信令包括以下信令至少之一：物理层控制信令，MAC-CE控制信令，以及RRC控制信令；第二控制信令包括以下信令至少之一：物理层控制信令，MAC-CE控制信令，以及RRC控制信令。
在一实施例中，在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系时，上述第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的上述第一传输参数的类型为第一类型传输参数；在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第二关系时，上述第二控制信令中预定指示域所通知的上述第一传输参数的类型为第二类型传输参数。
在一实施例中，在上述第一控制信令和上述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔小于上述预定阈值K时，上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为上述第一关系，在上述控制信令和上述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值K时，上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为上述第二关系；或者，在上 述控制信令和上述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔小于或者等于上述预定阈值K时，上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为上述第一关系，在上述控制信令和上述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔大于上述预定阈值K时，上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为上述第二关系；或者，在上述控制信令和上述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值K时，上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系，在上述控制信令和上述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔小于上述预定阈值K时，上述关系为上述第二关系。
下面结合示例性实施例，对本实施例进行举例说明。
示例性实施例1
在基于波束的通信中，物理共享信道(Physical share channel，PDSCH)的波束可以通过下行控制信息(Down control information，DCI)通知，当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于K时，终端还没有解码出DCI就需要射频接收缓存PDSCH，所以相关NR规定当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于预定阈值K时，根据最近时隙(slot)中的最低CORESETID对应的QCL参数获取PDSCH的DMRS的QCL参数，当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔大于或者等于预定阈值K时，采用DCI中指示的QCL信息获取PDSCH的DMRS的QCL参数。但是为了降低终端的盲检PDCCH复杂度，DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于K时PDCCH的负载与DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔大于或者等于K时PDCCH的负载相同。这样在DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于K时，DCI中的3比特TCI通知域(TCI通知域用于通知PDSCH的DMRS的QCL参数)存在，但是没有利用，相关NR的版本中，TCI通知域占有3比特。由此提出如下增强方案。
当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于K时，DCI中的3比特TCI通知域可以通知DCI中除TCI传输参数之外的一个或者多个传输参数(即所述第一传输参数)，相关NR DCI format1_1中的传输参数按照顺序如表1所示。从表1可以看出，DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔可以通过传输参数指示域5中指示的信息确定。
表1
Figure PCTCN2019076207-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2019076207-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2019076207-appb-000003
比如所述第一传输参数为如表1中编号为14的传输参数，当DCI和PDSCH的间隔小于K时，PUCCH的资源指示域可以采用表1中的编号为14的比特域和编号为17的比特域总共5比特指示最多从32个PUCCH资源中选择其中一个PUCCH资源，在一实施例中，当根据上行控制信息(uplink control information，UCI)负载确定PUCCH set为set0时，可以采用上述两个比特域联合指示PUCCH资源在set0中的索引，当根据UCI负载确定PUCCH set不是set0时，即使所述间隔小于K，也只采用表1中编号为14的比特域通知PUCCH的资源，不采用表1中的编号为14和编号为17的比特域联合指示的方式，因为这些set中的包括的最大PUCCH资源数为8。当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔大于或者等于K时，PUCCH的资源只用表1中编号为14的指示域指示最多从4个PUCCH资源中选择其中一个PUCCH资源。DCI和PDSCH的间隔小于K时，DCI中的指示域的顺序可以继续沿用表1的顺序，只是指示域14联合指示域17共同构成PUCCH资源指示域。或者此时也可以采用如表2所示的传输参数指示域顺序，表2相比表1的变化在于取消传输参数指示域17，传输参数指示域14的比特数变为5比特。
表2
Figure PCTCN2019076207-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2019076207-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2019076207-appb-000006
这样在DCI和PDSCH之间的传输间隔小于预定K值时，DCI就可以在32个PUCCH资源中动态选择，如表3所示；当DCI和PDSCH之间的传输间隔大于或者等于预定K值时，DCI只能在4个PUCCH资源中动态选择，如表4所示。
表3
DCI中PUCCH资源选择参数索引值 PUCCH资源
0 PUCCH资源1
1 PUCCH资源2
2 PUCCH资源3
3 PUCCH资源4
... ...
31 PUCCH资源32
表4
DCI中PUCCH资源选择参数指示值 PUCCH资源
0 PUCCH资源1
1 PUCCH资源2
2 PUCCH资源3
3 PUCCH资源4
在表3和表4中，表4中的4个PUCCH资源，和表3中的前4个PUCCH资源相同，这样基站在通知的时候，只需要通知32个PUCCH资源就可以，当然本实施例也不排除表3中的PUCCH资源和表4中的PUCCH资源可以不同。这样基站在用高层信令通知的时候，分别为表3和表4通知PUCCH资源。
在本实施例中，DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔，可以是如下间隔之一：
DCI的结束时域符号和PDSCH的开始时域符号之间的间隔；
DCI的起始时域符号和PDSCH的开始时域符号之间的间隔；
DCI所在的时隙中的CORESET结束符号中的最晚的时域符号和PDSCH的开始时域符号之间的间隔；
DCI所在的时隙中的CORESET的最早时域符号和PDSCH的开始时域符号之间的间隔；
DCI的结束时域符号和PDSCH在其占有的多个时隙中的每个时隙中的开始时域符号之间的间隔；
DCI的起始时域符号和PDSCH在其占有的多个时隙中的每个时隙中的开始时域符号之间的间隔。
上面是当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于预定门限K时，TCI的指示域借用于PUCCH资源指示。类似地，也可以当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于预定门限时，TCI的指示域借用于速率匹配(rate mating)指示域，类似地高层信令在配置rate mating信息时，需要配置两套rate mating的参数，比如一套参数用于建立类似于表3所述的表格，另一个套参数用于建立类似于表4所述的表格，或者采用一套参数，只是这套参数中的全部entry用于类似表3的建立，约定的部分entry(比如前M个entry，或者后M个entry)用于类似表4的建立，只不过此时表格3和表4中的表格就应该是索引值和rate mating信息之间的对应关系，而且此时表格3的状态数和表格4的状态数也会改变，比如高层配置的rate-match-PDSCH-resource-set中包括2个资源(resource)，当DCI和PDSCH之间的传输间隔小于预定阈值时，参照表5得到rate mating信息，表5中总共有2 (1+3)＝16个索引值，通过表1中的传输参数指示域8和传输参数指示域17联合指示；当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔传输时间间隔大于或者等于预定阈值时，参照表6得到rate mating信息，表6中总共2 (1)＝2个状态，通过表1中的传输参数指示域8指示。
表5
DCI中rate mating信息索引值 Rate mating信息
0 高层配置的rate mating信息1
1 高层配置的rate mating信息2
2 高层配置的rate mating信息3
3 高层配置的rate mating信息4
... ...
15 高层配置的rate mating信息16
表6
DCI中PUCCH资源选择参数指示值 PUCCH资源
0 高层配置的rate mating信息1
1 高层配置的rate mating信息2
类似地，当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于预定门限K时，TCI指示域可以用于表1中除TCI传输参数之外的其他20个参数中任意一个或者多个传输参数。比如当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于预定门限K时，TCI指示域的3比特中的其中前1个比特借用于rate mating信息的通知，后2个比特借用于ZP-CSI-RS信息的通知。或者通过约定规则或者信令信息确定当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于预定门限时，TCI域指示的传输参数的类型，或者TCI域的每个比特指示的传输参数类型。比如基站信令指示，当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于预定门限K时，TCI指示域的前1个比特用于rate mating信息的通知，TCI指示域后2个比特用于ZP-CSI-RS信息的通知，或者基站信令指示，当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于预定门限K时，TCI域的3个比特都用于rate mating信息的通知；或者基站通过信令通知，当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于预定门限K时，TCI域的前2个比特用于PDSCH频域资源的通知，TCI域后1个比特用于ZP-CSI-RS信息的通知。
上述实施例中，当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于K时，TCI指示域用于指示表1中的除TCI传输参数之外的其他类型的传输参数，也可以用于指示表1中没有的传输参数类型，比如用于指示CSI信息(其中CSI信息用于触发非周期CSI-RS和非周期CSI中的至少之一上报)，这样当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于K时，DCI中的TCI指示域借用于指示CSI触发信息，当DCI和PDSCH 之间的间隔大于K时，TCI指示域用于指示TCI信息，此时DCI中就不能指示CSI信息。
示例性实施例2
在本实施例中，根据物理层动态控制信令和第一信号的传输间隔与预定阈值之间的关系，确定如下信息至少之一：所述物理层动态控制信令的特定指示域指示的传输参数类型，所述物理层动态控制信令中是否包括指示特定传输参数类型的指示信息。
在一实施例中，当所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为关系一时，所述物理层动态控制信令的特定指示域用于指示第一类型的传输参数；当所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为关系二时，所述物理层动态控制信令的特定指示域用于指示第二类型的传输参数。
在一实施例中，当所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为关系一时，所述物理层动态控制信令中包括指示特定传输参数类型的指示信息；当所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为关系二时，所述物理层动态控制信令中不包括指示特定传输参数类型的指示信息。
在一实施例中，所述关系一为所述物理层动态控制信令和第一信号的传输间隔小于预定阈值，所述关系二为所述物理层动态控制信令和第一信号的传输间隔大于或者等于预定阈值；或者
所述关系一为所述物理层动态控制信令和第一信号的传输间隔小于或者等于预定阈值，所述关系二为所述物理层动态控制信令和第一信号的传输间隔大于预定阈值。
在一实施例中，所述传输参数可以是第一信号的传输参数，或者是第二信号的传输参数。
在一实施例中，当DCI和PDSCH(所述第一信号)之间的传输时间间隔小于K值时，表1中的编号为17的DCI中的指示域用于指示rate mating指示信息，当DCI和PDSCH之间的传输时间间隔大于或者等于K值时，表1中的编号为17的DCI中的指示域用于指示TCI信息。
或者，当DCI和PDSCH(所述第一信号)之间的传输时间间隔小于K值时，表1中的编号为17的DCI中的指示域用于指示CSI请求信息，当DCI和 PDSCH之间的传输时间间隔大于或者等于K值时，表1中的编号为17的DCI中的指示域用于指示TCI信息(即PDSCH的DMRS的QCL参数信息)。即当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于K时，DL-Grant的DCI中包括CSI请求指示信息，当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔大于或者等于K时，DL-Grant的DCI中不包括CSI请求指示信息。
示例性实施例3
在上述示例性实施例1和示例性实施例2中，第一传输参数的值集合中包括的候选参数值的个数会根据第一关系而变化，比如当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于K时，第一传输参数的值集合中包括X1个值，当DCI和PDSCH之间的大于K时，第一传输参数的值集合中包括X2个值。或者当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于K时，DCI中控制信令指示第一传输参数的索引值参照的索引值和第一传输值之间的对应映射表格为表格一(比如如表3所示)，当DCI和PDSCH之间的大于K时，DCI中控制信令指示第一传输参数的索引值参照的索引值和第一传输值之间的对应映射表格为表格二(比如表4所示)。
在一实施例中，DCI中是否存在TCI指示域也是per CORESET(Control resource set)配置的，配置CORESET1中的DCI中不存在TCI指示域，即CORESET1中的DCI不包括表1中编号为17的传输参数指示域，配置CORESET2中的DCI中存在TCI指示域，即CORESET2中的DCI包括表1中编号为17的传输参数指示域，且约定当DCI和PDSCH之间的传输间隔小于约定阈值(比如K)时，DCI中的TCI指示域用于指示rate mating信息，所以在CORESET2中传输的DCI中指示的rate mating信息所参照索引值和rate mating信息就有表5和表6两个表格，当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于预定门限时，参照表格5，当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔大于或者等于预定门限时，参照表格6，CORESET1中的DCI中指示的rate mating信息所参照的索引值和rating信息也参照表6。或者CORESET1中的DCI中指示的rate mating信息所参照的索引值和rating信息参照不同于表6的一张表，比如为表6-2，即此时rate mating信息所参照的表格有3个，这样基站在通过高层信令通知rate mating信息时，就需要针对各个表格通知rate mating信息，或者高层通过一个信令通知表6和表5的信息，通过另一个信令通知表6-2的信息。
即当DCI和PDSCH之间的传输间隔小于K时，DCI中的指示的rate mating信息的索引信息所参照的表格为表5，其他情况，DCI中的指示的rate mating信 息的索引信息所参照的表为表6。当DCI中没有TCI域时，DCI中的指示的rate mating信息的索引信息所参照的表为表6，或者DCI中的指示的rate mating信息的索引信息所参照的表为表6-2。
上述实施方式中，是DCI中指示的rate mating信息所参照的表格有Y个，类似地，也可以是DCI中指示的其他传输参数类型所参照的表格有Y个。Y为大于1的数，比如上述实施方式中Y＝2或者Y＝3。
示例性实施例4
在上述实施例中，根据第一信息确定第二信息，其中第二信息中包括如下信息至少之一：控制信令中通知第一传输参数所用的比特数N，控制信令中通知第一传输参数信息所参照的索引值和第一传输参数值之间的对应映射表格，控制信令中预定指示域通知的第一传输参数的类型，控制信令中通知第一传输参数所用的比特的位置信息。其中第一信息包括：所述控制信令和第一信号之间传输时间间隔与预定阈值之间的关系。
本实施例中，所述第一信息还包括如下信息一～信息十中的至少一个信息。
信息一：第二控制信令中包括的信息，比如基站给终端发送信令信息，所述信令信息中通知如下信息至少之一：是否TCI域可以借用于其他传输参数类型的通知，TCI域可借用于通知的传输参数类型，TCI域的哪些比特可借用于通知的传输参数类型，根据第二控制信令中通知的信息，用于确定第二信息。
信息二：所述第一控制信令所在的CORESET关联的TCI-PresentInDCI参数，TCI-PresentInDCI用于配置这个CORESET中发送的DL-Grant的DCI中是否存在TCI指示域，即是否存在表1中编号为17的指示域，比如当CORESTE关联的TCI-PresentInDCI不使能，则这个CORESET中DCI中不存在TCI域，第一传输参数所用的比特数不会随着DCI和PDSCH之间的传输时间间隔是否小于预定阈值K而改变。
信息三：信号所在的载频(carrier frequencies)是否小于预定阈值K1，比如当PDSCH在6GHz以下，则不会启动根据第一信息确定第二信息的机制；或者终端发送的可处理的频域范围，当终端的频域处理能力为FRI(即终端可处理的频域范围小于预定阈值，比如小于6GHz)，则不启动根据第一信息确定第二信息的机制。
信息四：第一通信节点需要检测的CORESET集合中，是否至少存在一个配置了空域接收参数(Spatial Rx parameter)的CORESET；比如终端需要检测 的CORESET集合中，不存在一个配置了空域接收参数的CORESET，则不启动根据第一信息确定第二信息的机制。
信息五：与第一通信节点需要检测专有搜索空间(Search space)关联的CORESET集合中，是否至少存在一个配置了空域接收参数的CORESET；比如与终端需要检测专有搜索空间关联的CORESET集合中，不存在一个配置了空域接收参数的CORESET，则不启动根据第一信息确定第二信息的机制。
信息六：与所述信号距离最近的时间单元中最低CORESETID的CORESET是否配置空域接收参数的CORESET；比如与PDSCH/AP-CSI-RS距离最近的时间单元中最低CORESETID的CORESET没有配置空域接收参数的CORESET，则不启动根据第一信息确定第二信息的机制。
信息七：与所述信号距离最近的时域符号中最低CORESETID的CORESET是否配置空域接收参数的CORESET；比如与PDSCH/AP-CSI-RS距离最近的时域符号中最低CORESETID的CORESET没有配置空域接收参数的CORESET，则不启动根据第一信息确定第二信息的机制。
信息八：与所述信号关联的TCI状态池(TCI state pool)中，是否至少存在一个TCI状态(TCI state)，所述TCI状态中reference RS set对应的QCL参数(QCL parameter)中包括空域接收参数；比如与PDSCH关联的RRC配置的TCI状态池1中，不存在一个TCI状态，所述TCI状态中的一个DL-RS对应的QCL参数(QCL parameter)包括空域接收参数，则不启动根据第一信息确定第二信息的机制。
信息九：与所述信号关联的激活的TCI状态池中，是否至少存在一个TCI状态，所述TCI状态中reference RS set对应的QCL参数中包括空域接收参数；比如与PDSCH关联的MAC-CE激活TCI状态池或者DCI中的TCI域能指示的TCI状态构成的TCI状态池中，不存在一个TCI状态，所述TCI状态中的一个DL-RS对应的QCL参数中包括空域接收参数，则不启动根据第一信息确定第二信息的机制。
信息十：第一通信节点上报的频域范围处理能力信息，比如终端上报其可处理的频域范围是FR1(即可处理的频域范围小于6GHz)，则不启动根据第一信息确定第二信息的机制，当终端上报其可处理的频域范围为FR2(即可处理的频域范围包括大于或者等于6GHz).则启动根据第一信息确定第二信息的机制。
示例性实施例5
在本实施例中，根据DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，确定DCI中通知的TCI域所参照的表格。
在一实施例中，当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于预定阈值K时，所述DCI中TCI所参照的表格为表格7，当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔大于或者等于预定阈值K时，所述DCI中TCI所参照的表格为表格8。其中TCI state10～TCI state17和TCI state20～TCI state27是由不同的高层控制信令配置的，其中所述高层控制信令包括RRC信令和MAC-CE信令中的至少之一。
在一实施例中，当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于K时，PDSCH的DMRS的空域接收参数根据约定规则得到(比如根据最近时隙中的最低CORESETID的CORESET的空域接收参数的配置得到)，PDSCH的DMRS的其他QCL参数信息通过DCI中TCI指示域并参照表7得到。或者PDSCH的DMRS的全部QCL参数通过DCI中TCI指示域指示的信息并参照表7获取，只是表7的配置有限制。当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔大于或者等于K时，PDSCH的DMRS的全部QCL参数都根据DCI中TCI指示域指示的信息并参照表8获取。
表7
DCI中TCI域的索引值 TCI state值
0 TCI state10
1 TCI state11
2 TCI state12
3 TCI state13
4 TCI state14
5 TCI state15
6 TCI state16
7 TCI state17
表8
DCI中TCI域的索引值 TCI state值
0 TCI state20
1 TCI state21
2 TCI state22
3 TCI state23
4 TCI state24
5 TCI state25
6 TCI state26
7 TCI state27
其中一个状态(state)用于建立Q个PDSCH的DMRS group和Q个DL-RS set之间的关联关系，其中Q为大于或者等于1的整数，如表9所示，一个TCI state-n中建立了(DMRS group1，DL-RS set1)和(DMRS group2，DL-RS set2)之间的关联，其中DL-RS set1包括{DL-RS1，DL-RS2}，DL-RS set2中包括DL-RS3，其中DMRS group1关于QCL-type1中的QCL参数和DL-RS1存在QCL关系，其中每个QCL-Type包括如下参数至少之一：多普勒频移(Doppler shift)，多普勒扩展(Doppler spread)，平均延迟(average delay)，延迟扩展(delay spread)，平均增益(average gain)，空域接收参数(Spatial Rx parameter)。其中DL-RS(Down-link reference signal)可以为CSI-RS/SSB/DMRS of PBCH，其中DMRS group也可以称为QCL target reference signal，DL-RS也可以称为QCL reference signal。
表9
Figure PCTCN2019076207-appb-000007
在一实施例中，表7中各个TCI state中关联的QCL-Type中包括空域接收参数这个QCL参数构成的DL-RS集合有预定的约束条件，其中所述约束条件包括如下至少之一：这个DL-RS集合中只包括一个DL-RS；这个集合中的DL-RS两两之间关于空域接收参数是QCL的；这个集合中的DL-RS终端能同时接收；这个DL-RS集合是空集；这个集合中的DL-RS属于一个分组，这个分组可以是基站分配的，也可以是终端上报。在一实施例中，比如表7中8个state中关联的QCL-Type中包括空域接收参数的DL-RS包括{DL-RS100，DL-RS101，DL-RS102，DL-RS103，DL-RS104，DL-RS105，DL-RS106，DL-RS107}(即statei中DMRS group和DL-RS10i至少关于Spatial Rx parameter满足QCL关系，i＝0，1，...，7)，这个集合中的DL-RS两两之间关于空域接收参数是QCL的，或者这些DL-RS可以同时被终端接收，或者表7中8个state中关联的QCL-Type 中包括空域接收参数的DL-RS都为DL-R100，或者表7中的8个state中的DL-RS关联的QCL-Type中都不包括空域接收参数，约定此时的PDSCH的DMRS的空域接收参数根据约定规则得到，比如约定此时PDSCH的DMRS和最低CORESETID中的DMRS关于空域接收参数是QCL的。
在本实施例中，当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于预定阈值K时，DCI中包括的TCI指示域参照的表格为表7，当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔大于或者等于预定阈值K时，DCI中的TCI指示域参照的表格为表8。因为表7中的TCI state中与空域接收参数关联的DL-RS的配置有限制，即这些TCI状态关联的波束只有一个或者只有有限个。因为此时终端还没有解码出DCI，就要求终端在没有解码出DCI之前就知道PDSCH的空域接收参数，而在表8中就没有这样的限制，从而需要表7和表8两张表。
表7的配置是高层信令配置的，为了实现不同时刻可以采用不同的波束，即使DCI和PDSCH之间的传输时间间隔小于K的时候，从而可以配置多个表7，每个表7配置其起作用的时域pattern，比如配置表7-1的周期和周期偏置，配置表7-2的周期和周期偏置。或者有两个表7，即表7-1和表7-2，配置表7-1的周期和周期偏置，其余的时隙中参照表7-2，即当DCI落在表7-1所示的时隙中时，这个DCI中通知的TCI域参照表7-1，当DCI落在其余时隙中时，DCI中通知的TCI域参照表7-2。也可以是配置3个表7，比如为表7-1，表7-2，表7-3，并配置表7-1的周期和周期偏置，也配置表7-2所示的周期和周期偏置，表7-3不配置周期和周期偏置，当DCI落在表7-1所在的时隙中时，DCI中的TCI指示域参照表7-1，当DCI落在表7-2所在的时隙中时，DCI中的TCI指示域参照表7-2，当DCI落在其他时隙中时，DCI中的TCI指示域参照表7-3。总之就是当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于预定阈值时，根据DCI中指示的TCI指示信息，参照PDSCH所在的时隙中对应TCI所参照的表格，得到PDSCH的QCL信息。如图5所示，配置表7-1～表7-3对应的时域pattern，当PDSCH落在slotn且PDSCH和DCI之间的间隔小于预定阈值K时，PDSCH的DMRS的QCL参数根据DCI中指示的TCI信息参照表7-1得到，当PDSCH落在slotn+1且PDSCH和DCI之间的间隔小于预定阈值K时，PDSCH的DMRS的QCL参数根据DCI中指示的TCI信息参照表7-2得到。当PDSCH落在slotn且PDSCH和DCI之间的间隔大于或者等于预定阈值K时，PDSCH的DMRS的QCL参数根据DCI中指示的TCI信息参照表8得到。
类似地，根据DCI和AP-CSI-RS之间的间隔和预定阈值之间的关系，确定AP-CSI-RS的TCI参数对应的表格。
在示例性实施例中，所述TCI指示信息，用于指示DMRS group/CSI-RS port group和DL-RS set之间的QCL关系，即一个TCI索引信息对应一个状态，一个状态中包括Q个DMRS group和Q个DL-RS set之间对应关系，一个DL-RS set中包括一个或者多个DL-RS，每个DL-RS关联一个QCL参数集合，表示所述DMRS group/CSI-RS port group中的参考信号和与其关联的DL-RS set中的一个DL-RS关于所述QCL参数集合满足QCL(quasi-co-location准共址)关系。两个参考信号关于一个QCL参数满足准共址关系，表示一个参考信号的所述QCL参数可以由两个参考信号的所述QCL参数获取，其中所述QCL参数包括如下参数至少之一：
多普勒频移(Doppler shift)，多普勒扩展(Doppler spread)，平均延迟(average delay)，延迟扩展(delay spread)，平均增益(average gain)，空域接收参数(Spatial Rx parameter)。
本示例性实施例中，两个参考信号是QCL的表示这两个参考信号至少关于Spatial Rx parameter是QCL的，这两个参考信号关于其他QCL参数是否QCL没有限制。
在示例性实施例中，信道也可以是一种信号，即在所述信道上传输信号。比如在数据信道上传输数据信号。
在示例性实施例中，不同的分量载波(component carrier，CC)可以通过不同的Serving cell ID关联。
在本实施例中，还提供了一种控制信令的接收方法，图9是根据本申请实施例的控制信令的发送方法流程图，如图9所示，该流程包括如下步骤S902和步骤S904。
在步骤S902中，根据第一信息确定第二信息。
在步骤S904中，根据上述第二信息接收第一控制信令。
其中，上述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和上述第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；上述第一信息包括：上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔 与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数。
在一实施例中，在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系时，上述N的取值包括N1；在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第二关系时，上述N的取值包括N2；其中，N1、N2为整数。
其中，上述N1和上述N2之间的关系满足以下至少之一：上述N1大于上述N2；上述N1与上述N2的差值小于或者等于传输配置指示(Transmission configuration indication，TCI)域所占的比特数；上述N1与上述N2的差值小于或者等于通知第二传输参数信息所需要的比特数。
在一实施例中，在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系时，上述对应映射表格为第一对应映射表格；在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第二关系时，上述对应映射表格为第二对应映射表格。
在一实施例中，上述第一对应映射表格、上述第二对应映射表格、传输参数取值集合一以及传输参数取值集合二中的任一项通过以下方式至少之一确定：方式一、发送的信令信息所包括的内容；方式二、发送端和接收端预先约定的规则；其中，上述传输参数取值集合一对应上述第一对应映射表格中包括的上述第一传输参数的取值集合，上述传输参数取值集合二对应上述第二对应映射表格中包括的上述第一传输参数的取值集合。
在一个实施方式中，在上述第一传输参数的类型为TCI时，上述第一对应映射表格中每个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号(Down link reference signal，DL-RS)构成的DL-RS集合中只包括一个DL-RS；在上述第一传输参数类型为TCI时，上述第一对应映射表格中每个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号DL-RS构成的DL-RS集合中DL-RS两两之间关于空间接收参数满足准共址(quasi co-location，QCL)关系。
在上述第一传输参数类型为TCI时，上述第一对应映射表格中每个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号DL-RS构成的DL-RS集合中的DL-RS能被第一通信节点同时接收；在上述第一传输参数类型为TCI时，上述第一对应映射表格中每个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号DL-RS构成的DL-RS集合为空集；其中，上述第一通信节点为接收上述第一信号和上述第一控制信令中至少之一的通信节点。
在一实施例中，上述第一传输参数的类型为上述第一控制信令中包括的除TCI传输参数类型之外的一个或者多个传输参数类型；或者，上述第一传输参数类型为TCI传输参数。
在一实施例中，上述第一传输参数满足以下至少之一：上述第一传输参数为上述第一信号的传输参数；上述第一传输参数为第二信号的传输参数。
在一实施例中，上述第一信号或者上述第二信号包括以下信号至少之一：解调参考信号、测量参考信号、控制信道信号、以及数据信道信号；上述第一控制信令为物理层控制信令。
在一个实施方式中，上述第一信息还包括以下信息至少之一：第二控制信令中包括的信息；上述第一控制信令所在的控制资源集合(control resource set，CORESET)对应的传输配置指示(transmission configuration indication，TCI-PresentInDCI)是否使能信息；上述第一信号或者上述第二信号所在的载频与预定阈值G之间的关系；第一通信节点反馈的支持的频率范围能力；上述预设阈值K是否为0；第一通信节点需要检测的CORESET中是否至少存在一个配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与上述第一通信节点需要检测专有搜索空间关联的CORESET集合中是否至少存在一个配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与上述第一信号或者上述第二信号距离最近的时间单元中具有最低控制资源集合标识(control resource set identity，CORESETID)的CORESET是否配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与上述第一信号或者上述第二信号距离最近的时域符号中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET是否配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与上述第一信号或者上述第二信号关联的TCI状态池中是否至少存在一个TCI状态，其中，上述TCI状态中与参考信号集合参考结合reference RS set对应的QCL参数中包括空间接收参数；与上述第一信号或者第二信号关联的激活TCI状态池中，是否至少存在一个TCI状态，上述TCI状态中于所述参考信号集合reference RS set对应的QCL参数中包括空间接收参数；其中，上述第一通信节点为接收上述第一信号和上述第二信号中至少之一的通信节点。
在一实施例中，在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系时，上述第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的上述第一传输参数的类型为第一类型传输参数；在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第二关系时，上述第二控制信令中预定指示域所通知的上述第一传输参数的类型为第二类型传输参数。
在一实施例中，在上述第一控制信令和上述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔小于上述预定阈值K时，上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为上述第一关系，在上述控制信令和上述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值K时，上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为上述第二关系；或者，在上述控制信令和上述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔小于或者等于上述预定阈值K时，上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为上述第一关系，在上述控制信令和上述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔大于上述预定阈值K时，上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为上述第二关系；或者，在上述控制信令和上述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值K时，上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系，在上述控制信令和上述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔小于上述预定阈值K时，上述关系为上述第二关系。
通过以上的实施方式的描述，本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到根据上述实施例的方法可借助软件加必需的通用硬件平台的方式来实现，当然也可以通过硬件，但很多情况下前者是更佳的实施方式。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对相关技术做出贡献的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质(如ROM/RAM、磁碟、光盘)中，包括若干指令用以使得一台终端设备(可以是手机，计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述的方法。
实施例2
在本实施例中提供了一种信息的确定方法，图10是根据本申请实施例的信息的确定方法流程图，如图10所示，该流程包括如下步骤S1002。
步骤S1002，根据第一信息确定第二信息。
其中，该第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一信号的准共址QCL参数；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的发送方式；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的接收方式；其中，该第一信息包括以下信息至少之一：特定控制资源集合CORESET之后预定时间窗中是否存在该第二信号，该第一信号和特定CORESET之间的间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，该第二信号和特定CORESET之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，该第一信号和第一控制信令之间的 时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，该第二信号和第二控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，第一信号对应的第一空间接收参数和第二信号对应的第二空间接收参数之间的关系，其中X1、X2为实数。
其中，所述特定CORESET即表示预定CORESET，即表示根据预定规则得到的CORESET。
通过上述步骤S1002，通过第一信息确定第二信息，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一信号的准共址QCL参数；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的发送方式；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的接收方式；其中，所述第一信息包括以下信息至少之一：特定控制资源集合CORESET之后预定时间窗中是否存在所述第二信号，所述第一信号和特定CORESET之间的间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，所述第二信号和特定CORESET之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，所述第一信号和第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，所述第二信号和第二控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，第一信号对应的第一空间接收参数和第二信号对应的第二空间接收参数之间的关系，其中X1、X2为实数。在一实施例中，根据所述确定的第二信息发送或者接收所述第一信号。也即通过信号和控制信道资源，或者信号和调度信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值之间的关系，确定两个信号之间的复用问题，或者两个信号的接收问题，克服了相关技术中终端检测控制信令存在延迟，以及同一时刻打出的射频波束有限所导致的无法正确接收信号的缺陷。
在一实施例中，上述步骤的执行主体可以为基站等，但不限于此。
在一实施例中，上述第一控制信令和第二控制信令中至少之一的格式可以结合上述实施例1中所描述的方法进行确定。
在一实施例中，所述第一控制信令为调度所述第一信号的物理层动态控制信令，所述第二控制信令为调度所述第二信号的物理层动态控制信令。
在一个实施方式中，上述特定CORESET满足以下特征至少之一：上述CORESET是距离上述第一信号最近的时域符号中具有最低控制资源集合标识CORESET ID的CORESET；上述CORESET是距离上述第一信号最近的时间单元中具有最低CORESET ID的CORESET；在上述CORESET中终端需要检测调度下行信号和信道的下行控制信息DCI中的至少之一；在上述CORESET中不包括调度上述第一信号的控制信令信息；在上述CORESET中包括调度上述第 二信号的控制信令信息；上述CORESET至少与一个专有搜索空间关联；上述CORESET是距离上述第一信号和上述第二信号中至少之一最近的时间单元中的所有载波单元CC具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；上述CORESET是距离上述第一信号和上述第二信号中至少之一最近的时间单元中的预定CC中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；上述CORESET是距离上述第一信号和上述第二信号中至少之一最近的时间单元中的预定CC组中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；上述CORESET是一个时间单元中预定M个时域符号中的CORESET，其中，M小于或者等于上述时间单元中包括的时域符号个数。
在一实施例中，在上述第一信号和上述CORESET之间的时间间隔小于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号的QCL参数根据上述CORESET的QCL参数获取；在上述第一信号和上述CORESET之间的间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号的QCL参数通过上述第一信号的配置信息中配置的QCL参数获取。
在一实施例中，在上述第一信号和上述CORESET之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号的QCL参数优先级高于上述第二信号的QCL参数；在上述第一信号和上述CORESET之间的间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号的QCL参数优先级低于上述第二信号的QCL参数。
在一实施例中，在上述第一信号和上述CORESET之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号和上述第二信号之间不允许采用频分复用的方式；在上述第一信号和上述CORESET之间的间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号和上述第二信号允许采用频分复用的方式。
在一实施例中，上述第一信号和上述第二信号中至少之一包括以下信号至少之一：下行测量参考信号、下行同步信号、下行解调参考信号、下行数据信道信号、以及下行控制信道信号。
在一实施例中，上述预定阈值X1与预定阈值X2相等；和/或上述第二信号的QCL参数根据调度上述第二信号的控制信息和上述第二信号之间的间隔与上述预定阈值X2之间的关系确定。
在一实施例中，上述第一信号满足如下特征至少之一：上述第一信号为物理层动态控制信令调度的下行信号；上述第一信号为下行物理控制信道信号；调度上述第一信号的控制信令和上述第一信号之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1。
在一实施例中，上述第二信号满足以下特征至少之一：调度上述第二信号的控制信令在上述第一信号所在的时域符号之前；调度上述第二信号的控制信令和上述第一信号所在的时域符号之间的间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值X3；调度上述第二信号的控制信令和上述第二信号所在的起始时域符号之间的间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值X3；上述第二信号是物理层动态控制信令调度的下行信号；上述第二信号为周期下行测量参考信号；其中X3为实数。
在一实施例中，所述控制信令包括以下信令至少之一：物理层控制信令，MAC-CE控制信令，以及RRC控制信令。
在一实施例中，在上述CORESET之后预定时间窗中存在上述第二信号时，上述第一信号的QCL参数根据上述第二信号的QCL参数确定；在上述CORESET之后预定时间窗中不存在上述第二信号时，上述第一信号的QCL参数不根据上述第二信号的QCL参数确定；和/或在上述CORESET之后预定时间窗中存在上述第二信号，上述第一信号和调度上述第一信号的控制信令之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号的QCL参数不根据上述CORESET的QCL参数获取；在上述CORESET之后预定时间窗中不存在上述第二信号，上述第一信号和调度上述第一信号的控制信令之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号的QCL参数根据CORESET的QCL参数获取。
在一实施例中，上述第一信号和上述第二信号之间满足以下特征至少之一：上述第二信号的空间接收参数和上述第一信号的空间接收参数不同；上述第二信号的空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器和上述第一信号的空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器在第一通信节点不能同时打出；上述第二信号和上述第一信号属于不同的CC；上述第一信号所在的时域位置和上述第二信号所在的时域位置之间的交集为非空集合；上述第一信号和上述第二信号在相同的时域位置上；上述第二信号的优先级高于上述第一信号的优先级。
在一实施例中，在上述第二信息为上述第一信号的准共址QCL参数时，上述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括：根据上述第一信息确定如下信息至少之一：上述第一信号和上述第二信号的QCL参数之间的优先级；上述第一信号的配置信息中配置的QCL参数和特定CORESET的QCL参数之间的优先级；当上述第一信号和调度上述第一信号的控制信令之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号的QCL参数是否根据特定CORESET的QCL参数获取。
在一实施例中，在上述第二信息为第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的 接收方式时，上述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括根据上述第一信息确定如下信息至少之一：是否在上述第二信号所在的时域位置上接收上述第一信号；是否在上述第二信号所在的时域位置上检测控制信道；在上述第二信号所在的时域位置上，上述第一信号的QCL参数和上述第二信号的QCL参数之间的优先级；上述第一信号和上述第二信号之间能否频分复用；上述第一信号可在的时域位置是否包括第二信号所在的时域位置。
在一实施例中，在上述第二信息为第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的发送方式时，上述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括根据上述第一信息确定如下信息至少之一：是否在上述第二信号所在的时域位置上发送上述第一信号；是否在上述第二信号所在的时域位置上发送控制信道；在上述第二信号所在的时域位置上，上述第一信号的QCL参数和上述第二信号的QCL参数之间的优先级；上述第一信号和上述第二信号之间能否频分复用；上述第一信号可在的时域位置是否包括第二信号所在的时域位置。
在一实施例中，上述第二信号所在的时域位置包括如下时域位置之一：上述第二信号所在的时域符号；上述第二信号所在的时间单位。
在一实施例中，上述方法还包括：不接收满足以下特征的配置：当调度上述第一信号的上述第一控制信令和上述第一信号之间的间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值X1，调度上述第二信号的上述第二控制信令和上述第二信号之间的间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值X2时，上述第一信号和上述第二信号关于空间接收参数不满足QCL关系；当调度上述第一信号的上述第一控制信令和上述第一信号之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1，调度上述第二信号的上述第二控制信令和上述第二信号之间的间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值X2时，上述第一信号的QCL参数根据上述第二信号的QCL参数确定；当调度上述第一信号的上述第一控制信令和上述第一信号之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1，调度上述第二信号的上述第二控制信令和上述第二信号之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X2时，上述第一信号的QCL参数和上述第二信号的QCL参数的优先级根据约定规则或者信令信息获取。
在一实施例中，上述第一信息还包括以下信息至少之一：上述特定CORESET中包括的控制信令中是否包括传输配置指示TCI指示域；上述第一信号和上述第二信号中至少之一所在的载频与预定阈值G之间的关系；上述预设阈值X1和上述预定阈值X2中至少之一是否为0；特定CORESET中是否至少 存在一个配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；上述第一通信节点需要检测的CORESET集合中是否至少存在一个配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与上述第一信号或者上述第二信号关联的TCI状态池中是否至少存在一个TCI状态，其中，上述TCI状态中与参考信号集合对应的QCL参数中包括空间接收参数；与上述第一信号或者第二信号关联的激活TCI状态池中，是否至少存在一个TCI状态，上述TCI状态中与上述参考信号集合对应的QCL参数中包括空间接收参数；其中，上述第一通信节点为接收上述第一信号的通信节点。
在一实施例中，在上述第一信息为第一信号对应的第一空间接收参数和第二信号对应的第二空间接收参数之间的关系时，上述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括如下方式至少之一：上述第一信号和上述第二信号关于空间接收参数满足QCL关系时，上述第一信号可在的时域符号包括上述第二信号所在的时域符号；上述第一信号和上述第二信号关于空间接收参数不满足QCL关系时，上述第一信号可在的时域符号不包括上述第二信号所在的时域符号；在上述第一空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器和上述第二空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器第一通信节点能同时产生时，上述第一信号可在的时域符号包括上述第二信号所在的时域符号；在上述第一空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器和上述第二空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器第一通信节点不能同时产生时，上述第一信号可在的时域符号不包括上述第二信号所在的时域符号。
需要说明的是，上述第一信号可在的时域符号不包括上述第二信号所在的时域符号可以为在第二信号所在的时域符号位置上，不发送和/或不接收所述第一信号做速率匹配。
在一实施例中，在上述第一信息为上述第一信号和第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，且上述第二信息为第一信号的准共址QCL参数时，上述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括以下至少之一：上述第一信号在一个时间单元的不同时域符号上，上述QCL参数保持不变；上述第一信号在不同时间单元上，上述QCL参数可以不同；上述第一信号B1套QCL参数和A个时间单元之间存在对应关系；在上述第一信号所在的A个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的上述第一信号的QCL参数根据距离该时间单元最近的时间单元中具有预定特征的CORESET的QCL参数获取；在上述第一信号所在的A个时间单元中根据每个时间单元中上述第一信号和上述第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与上述预定阈值X1之间的关系，确定该时间单元中上述第一信号的QCL参数； 其中，上述第一信号占有A个时间单元中，A为大于1的自然数，其中B1为小于或者等于A的非负整数。
需要说明的是，上述时间单元可以是一个时隙，也可以是一个子帧，或者其他时间单元。
在一实施例中，在上述第一信息为上述第一信号和第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，且上述第二信息为第一信号的准共址QCL参数时，上述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括以下至少之一：根据A个时间单元中最前面的一个时间单元中上述第一信号和上述第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与上述预定阈值X1之间的关系，确定上述第一信号的QCL参数，上述第一信号在上述A个时间单元中的QCL参数保持不变；在上述第一信号所在的A1个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的上述第一信号的QCL参数根据距离该时间单元最近的时间单元中具有预定特征的CORESET的QCL参数获取，其中上述A1个时间单元中的最后一个时间单元中的上述第一信号和上述第一控制信令之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1；在上述第一信号所在的A2个时间单元中上述第一信号的QCL参数保持不变；上述第一信号B2套QCL参数和上述A2个时间单元之间存在对应关系；在上述第一信号所在的A2个时间单元中上述第一信号的QCL参数保持不变，在上述第一信号在上述A2个时间单元中的QCL参数根据上述第一控制信令通知的信息确定，其中上述A2个时间单元中最前面的时间单元中的上述第一信号和上述第一控制信令之间的间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值X1；其中，上述第一信号占有A个时间单元中，A为大于1的自然数，A1，A2为小于或者等于上述A值的非负整数，B2为小于或者等于A2的非负整数。
下面结合示例性实施例，对本实施例进行举例说明。
示例性实施例6
在本实施例中，基站和终端约定，同一时域符号上的多个下行信号之间满足QCL关系，即终端不希望基站配置在同一个时域符号中的多个下行信号不满足QCL关系，或者同一时域符号上的多个下行信号两两之间满足QCL关系。
其中所述多个下行信号包括如下信号中的至少两个信号：PDSCH数据信号，CORESET，下行测量参考信号，多个CC的下行信号。比如终端不希望收到不满足如下配置的下行信号在一个时域符号上，多个下行信号之间不满足QCL关系；或者在一个时域符号上多个下行信号和最低CORESETID的DMRS不满足QCL关系。
如图6a所示，终端希望同一时刻配置的属于不同CC(component carrier)的两个PDSCH的DMRS需要满足QCL关系。如图6b所示，终端希望同一时刻配置的CC1上的PDSCH/DMRS和CC2上的CORESET的DMRS之间要满足QCL关系。如图6c所示，终端希望同一时刻配置的属于不用CC的两个CORESET的DMRS之间需要满足QCL关系。如图6d所示，终端希望同一时刻配置的属于CC1上的PDSCH/DMRS和CC2上的CORESET的DMRS之间需要满足QCL关系。
图6a～6d中是属于不同CC的多个下行信号之间需要满足QCL关系，图7a～7d中是属于相同CC的多个下行信号之间需要满足QCL关系。图7e是一个CC中的两个CSI-RS之间需要满足QCL关系。类似地，需要要求相同时域符号上来自不同CC的CSI-RS至少关于Spatial Rx parameter之间是QCL的。
在一实施例中，所述最低CORESETID满足如下特征至少之一：所述最低CORESETID是距离所述时域符号最近的时域符号中的最低CORESETID；所述最低CORESETID是距离所述时域符号最近的时隙中的最低CORESETID；所述CORESET和所述时域符号之间的距离小于预定阈值K。
在本实施例中，不同的CC可以和不同的Serving cell ID对应。
示例性实施例7
本示例性实施例中，根据第一信号和特定的CORESET之间的间隔与预定阈值之间的关系，确定如下信息至少之一：第一信号的QCL参数，同一时域符号上第一信号和第二信号的QCL参数之间的优先级，第一信号的QCL参数和所述特定CORESET的QCL参数之间的优先级，同一时域符号上第一信号和第二信号之间能否频分复用。
在一实施例中，所述特定CORESET满足如下特征至少之一：所述CORESET是距离所述下行信号最近的时域符号中的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；所述CORESET是距离所述下行信号最近的时隙中的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；在所述CORESET中终端需要检测调度下行信号和信道的DCI中的至少之一；在所述CORESET中不包括调度所述第一信号的控制信令信息；在所述CORESET中包括调度所述第二信号的控制信令信息；所述CORESET至少与一个专有搜索空间(Search space)关联。
在一实施例中，当所述第一信号和所述CORESET之间的间隔小于预定阈值时，所述第一信号的QCL参数根据所述CORESER的QCL参数获取；当所 述第一信号和最低CORESETID之间的间隔大于或者等于预定阈值时，所述第一信号的QCL参数通过下行信号配置信息中配置的QCL参数获取。
在一实施例中，当所述第一信号和所述CORESET之间的间隔小于预定阈值时，第一信号的QCL参数优先级高于第二信号的QCL参数；当所述第一信号和所述CORESET之间的间隔大于或者等于预定阈值时，第一信号的QCL参数优先级低于第二信号的QCL参数。
在一实施例中，当所述第一信号和所述CORESET之间的间隔小于预定阈值时，第一信号和第二信号之间不能频分复用；当所述第一信号和所述CORESET之间的间隔大于或者等于预定阈值时，所述第一信号和所述第二信号可以频分复用。
其中所述QCL参数包括如下参数至少之一：多普勒频移(Doppler shift)，多普勒扩展(Doppler spread)，平均延迟(average delay)，延迟扩展(delay spread)，平均增益(average gain)，空域接收参数(Spatial Rx parameter)。
在一实施例中，所述第一信号包括如下信号至少之一：下行测量参考信号，下行同步信号，下行解调参考信号，下行数据信道信号，以及下行控制信道信号。
在一实施例中，所述第二信号包括如下信号至少之一：下行测量参考信号，下行同步信号，下行解调参考信号，下行数据信道信号，以及下行控制信道信号。
在一实施例中，所述预定阈值与第二预定阈值相等，其中所述第二信号的QCL参数根据调度第二信号的控制信息和所述第二信号之间的间隔与所述第二预定阈值之间的关系，确定第二信号的QCL参数。
在一实施例中，相关NR规定当DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔小于预定阈值K时，采用最近时隙中的最低CORESETID的空域接收参数接收PDSCH，因为在终端缓存PDSCH的时候，DCI还没有解出来，需要采用已知的波束缓存PDSCH。PDSCH可以存在于DCI之后K个时域符号的时间窗中的任意位置，此时在DCI之后K个时域符号时间窗中的PDSCH终端都需要采用最低CORESETID中的波束缓存PDSCH，但是实际可能不存在这些潜在PDSCH，但是终端还是需要缓存这些PDSCH。问题是如果在这个时间窗中存在周期CSI-RS而且周期CSI-RS的空域接收参数和终端需要缓存的PDSCH的空域接收参数不同，就需要确定两者之间的优先级。
方式一是基站和终端约定在这个窗口中的下行信号和信道中至少之一的空域接收参数都以最低CORESETID的CORESET的空域接收参数为准，下行信号和信道中至少之一的其他QCL参数也以最低CORESETID为准，或者其他QCL参数根据下行信号或者信道的配置信息得到，比如根据周期CSI-RS的配置信息中QCL参数配置信息得到。
方式二：基站和终端约定当周期CSI-RS和最近时隙中的最低CORESETID的CORESET之间的距离小于预定阈值K时，周期CSI-RS的至少空域接收参数这个QCL参数优于同时域符号的潜在PDSCH的空域接收参数，当周期CSI-RS和最近时隙中的最低CORESETID的CORESET之间的距离大于或者等于预定阈值K，同一时域符号上的PDSCH的空域接收参数优于同时域符号的CSI-RS的空域接收参数。
如图2所示，距离slotn上周期CSI-RS最近的时隙中的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET为slotn上的CORESET0，在slotn上PDSCH和CSI-RS在相同时域符号上时，以CSI-RS的波束接收CSI-RS和PDSCH，即此时PDSCH的空域接收参数优先级低于周期CSI-RS的空域接收参数。此时对于slotn中没有周期CSI-RS的符号上，一种方式是采用周期CSI-RS的空域接收参数接收PDSCH，从而减少终端在slotn上的波束切换次数，或者终端和基站约定在slotn没有CSI-RS的时域符号上，采用距离PDSCH最低CORESET的波束接收PDSCH，如图3所示。
距离slotn+2上的周期CSI-RS最近的时隙中的最低CORESETID还是slotn中的CORESET0(在slotn+1，slotn+2上终端都不需要检测CORESET)，此时slotn+2上的周期CSI-RS域CORESET0之间的距离大于所述预定阈值，则slotn+2上如果PDSCH和CSI-RS在相同时域符号上时，则采用PDSCH的波束接收PDSCH和CSI-RS，即此时PDSCH的空域接收参数优先级高于周期CSI-RS的空域接收参数。或者在slotn+2上当相同时域符号上的PDSCH和CSI-RS的接收波束冲突时，放弃测量CSI-RS。因为在slotn上终端需要缓存CORESET0调度的PDSCH时，DCI还没有解出来，可能没有PDSCH，则此时就优先接收周期CSI-RS，在slotn+2上的终端需要缓存的PDSCH对应的DCI，终端已经解出来了，那此时的PDSCH是终端确定基站调度了的。
示例性实施例8
在本实施例中，根据第一信息，确定第二信息，其中第二信息包括如下信 息至少之一：第一信号的QCL参数，是否在第一信号上检测控制信道，是否接收第一信号，以及第一信号可在的时域符号位置。其中第一信息包括如下信息至少之一：特定CORESET之后预定时间窗中是否存在第二信号。
在一实施例中，所述特定CORESET满足如下特征至少之一：所述CORESET是距离所述第二信号最近的时域符号中的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；所述特定CORESET是距离所述第二信号最近的时隙中的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；在所述CORESET中终端需要检测调度下行信号和信道的DCI中的至少之一；所述CORESET是距离所述第一信号最近的时域符号中的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；所述特定CORESET是距离所述第一信号最近的slot中的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET。
在一实施例中，所述第一信号包括如下信号至少之一：非周期下行测量参考信号，物理层动态控制信令调度的下行数据信道信号，物理层动态控制信令调度的下行信号，以及下行物理控制信道信号。
在一实施例中，所述第二信号满足如下特征至少之一：所述第二信号是之前调度的信号；所述第二信号为周期下行测量参考信号；所述第二信号为非周期下行测量参考信号，其中调度非周期测量参考信号的DCI和所述非周期测量参考信号之间的间隔大于或者等于预定阈值；所述第二信号为半持续PDSCH，其中激活SPS-PDSCH的DCI和SPS-PDSCH之间的间隔大于或者等于预定阈值；所述第二信号为动态调度的PDSCH，其中动态调度PDSCH的DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔大于或者等于预定阈值。
在一实施例中，当所述特定CORESET之后预定时间窗中存在所述第二信号时，所述第一信号的QCL参数根据第二信号的QCL参数得到；当所述特定CORESET之后预定时间窗中不存在所述第二信号时，第一信号的QCL参数获取参数中不包括所述第二信号的QCL参数。
在一实施例中，在所述第二信号所在的时域符号上，和第二通信节点约定不会存在第一信号。
在一实施例中，在所述第二信号所在的时域符号上，和第二通信节点不在第一信号上检测控制信道。
在一实施例中，所述第二信号的空域接收参数和第一信号的空域接收参数不同，或者所述第二信号的空域接收参数对应的空间滤波器和第一信号的空域接收参数对应的空间滤波器第一通信节点不能同时打出。
在一实施例中，所述第二信号和第一信号属于不同的CC。
在一实施例中，如图1a所示，在slotn中基站给终端调度了PDSCH1，其中调度PDSCH1的DCI(此DCI在图1a中的CORESET1中)和PDSCH1的距离大于预定阈值K，从而在slotn中终端确定地知道slotn中基站已经调度了PDSCH1，从而PDSCH1的QCL参数就可以通过调度PDSCH1的DCI中指示的信息获取。在slotn中终端还需要继续检测CORESET0和CORESET2中的至少之一，CORESET0或者CORESET2中的DCI可能会给终端调度PDSCH2，例如可以是PDSCH2和PDSCH1在不同的CC中，由于在接收潜在的PDSCH2的时候，调度的PDSCH2的DCI终端还没有解出来，按照规定需要潜在的PDSCH2需要采用slotn中的所有CC中的最低CORESETID的波束接收PDSCH2，比如需要采用CORESET0的波束接收PDSCH2，当动态指示的PDSCH1的接收波束(通过DCI中指示的空域接收参数信息)和CORESET0的波束不同时，就需要确定PDSCH1和PDSCH2的空域接收参数的优先级。由于PDSCH1是确定调用的，PDSCH2不一定存在，优先地采用PDSCH1的波束接收潜在的PDSCH1和PDSCH2。
如图1b，在slotn中基站给终端调度了非周期测量参考信号(Channel-state information reference signal，CSI-RS)，其中调度非周期CSI-RS的DCI和非周期测量参考信号的间距大于预定阈值K，slotn中终端还需要检测CORESET0，CORESET0有可能在slotn中给终端调度PDSCH，则在slotn中的PDSCH和CSI-RS同时域符号时，需要确定PDSCH和CSI-RS的QCL参数的优先级，同理，由于非周期测量参考信号是确定已经调度的，从而终端至少在CSI-RS所在的时域符号上采用非周期测量参考信号接收CSI-RS和潜在的PDSCH，slotn中不存在非周期测量参考信号的时域符号上，可以采用slotn中最低CORESETID的CORESET的QCL参数获取潜在PDSCH的QCL参数，或者规定在slotn中潜在PDSCH所在的时域符号中都采用非周期CSI-RS的接收波束接收PDSCH。
从图1a，1b可以看出，即使PDSCH和调度PDSCH的DCI之间的距离小于预定阈值K，PDSCH的QCL参数不一定采用PDSCH最近的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET的QCL参数获取，还要看在PDSCH所在的时域符号上是否存在第二信号，当存在第二信号时，至少第一信号的空域接收参数根据第二信号的空域接收参数确定，当不存在第二信号时，才根据距离PDSCH最近的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET的QCL参数获取PDSCH的QCL参数， 其中所述QCL参数至少包括空域接收参数。
图1c所示，当PDSCH和调度PDSCH的DCI之间的间距小于预定阈值K时，PDSCH的至少空域接收参数根据距离PDSCH最近的时域符号中的最低CORESETID的空域接收参数获取(即根据CORESET1的空域接收参数获取PDSCH的空域接收参数)，而不是根据距离PDSCH最近的时隙中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET的空域接收参数获取，即不是根据CORESET0的空域接收获取PDSCH的空域接收参数。
如图1d所示，当PDSCH和调度PDSCH的DCI之间的间距小于预定阈值K时，PDSCH需要采用距离PDSCH最近的时隙中的CORESET的接收波束接收PDSCH，而潜在的PDSCH可以存在于时隙中的任意时域符号上，这样在CORESET1所在的时域符号上，就需要同时接收潜在的PDSCH和CORESET1，当CORESET1的接收波束和CORESET0的接收波束不同，或者这两个接收波束终端不能同时打出时，就需要规定这两者之间的优先级，一种方式是规定在CORESET1上的潜在PDSCH和CORESET1至少关于空域接收参数是QCL的。另一种方式是规定在CORESET1上PDSCH不存在，其中PDSCH和调度PDSCH的DCI之间的间隔小于预定阈值K。
如图1e所示，当一个时隙中终端在多个时域符号上检测CORESET，而且需要缓存潜在的PDSCH，其中潜在的PDSCH表示PDSCH和调度PDSCH的DCI之间的间隔小于预定阈值K，此时PDSCH的QCL参数不是根据距离PDSCH最近的时隙中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET的QCL参数获取(如图1e中的PDSCH的QCL参数不是根据CORESET0的QCL参数获取)，而是根据距离PDSCH最近的时隙中前3个时域符号中的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET的QCL参数获取。具有最低CORESETID的CORESET的QCL参数获取(如图1e中的PDSCH的QCL参数根据CORESET1的QCL参数获取)。
如图1f所示，当slotn中已经确定基站给终端调度了PDSCH，即此时调度PDSCH的DCI和PDSCH之间的间隔大于预定阈值K，而在slotn上基站还给终端半静态配置需要检测CORESET。此时一种方式是规定，终端在PDSCH所在的时域符号上，当CORESET和PDSCH之间空域接收参数之间不同时，终端不需要在这个时域符号上接收和检测CORESET，或者终端和基站规定，此时的PDSCH的DMRS与和PDSCH相同时域符号上的CORESET至少关于空域接收参数是QCL的。或者终端和基站约定，在PDSCH和CORESET相同时域符号 上且两者的空域接收参数对应的接收波束不同时，以CORESET的空域接收参数对应的接收波束接收PDSCH和CORESET。
示例性实施例9
在本实施例中，讲述当PDSCH占有多个时隙时，PDSCH的QCL参数如何获取。
首先一个问题是，PDSCH和调度PDSCH的DCI之间的距离如何获取，包括以下两种获取方式。
时间间隔获取方式一，根据PDSCH占有的A个时隙中的最前面的一个时隙中PDSCH的起始符号位置和DCI之间的一个时间间隔和预定阈值X1(比如为K值，当然本申请也不排除X1和K不相同的情况)，得到PDSCH的QCL参数的获取方式，比如所述时间间隔小于预定阈值X1，则PDSCH的QCL参数根据距离PDSCH的最近的时隙中的特定CORESET(比如是所述时隙中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET)的QCL参数获取PDSCH的QCL参数，如果所述时间间隔大于或者等于预定阈值X1，则PDSCH的QCL参数DCI中指示的信息获取，如图4b所示。
时间间隔获取方式二，根据PDSCH占有的A个时隙中的每个时隙中PDSCH的起始符号位置和DCI之间的A个时间间隔和预定阈值X1(比如为K值，当然本申请也不排除X1和K不相同的情况)，得到每个时隙中的PDSCH的QCL参数的获取方式，比如前A1个时隙中的PDSCH和DCI之间的间隔小于预定阈值X1，则A1个时隙中的PDSCH的QCL参数根据距离PDSCH的最近的时隙中的特定CORESET(比如是所述时隙中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET)的QCL参数获取PDSCH的QCL参数，后A2个时隙中PDSCH和DCI之间的间隔大于或者等于预定阈值X1，则PDSCH的QCL参数DCI中指示的信息获取，如图4a所示。
另一个问题是，所述根据距离PDSCH最近的时隙中的具有预定特征的CORESET的QCL参数获取，有如下两种理解方式。
QCL获取方式一：根据距离PDSCH占有的A个时隙中最前面的时隙中最近的时隙中的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET的QCL参数获取A个时隙中PDSCH的QCL参数，PDSCH在A个时隙中的QCL参数获取方式不变，或者称为PDSCH在A个时隙中的QCL参数保持不变。
QCL获取方式二：根据PDSCH占有的A个slot中每个时隙中距离该时隙 最近的时隙中的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET的QCL参数获取该时隙中PDSCH的QCL参数，PDSCH在A个时隙中的QCL参数获取方式可以不同，或者称为PDSCH在A个时隙中的QCL参数可以改变。
其中时间间隔获取方式一和二，可以和QCL参数获取方式一和二任意搭配。
在一实施例中，当采用时间间隔获取方式一和QCL获取方式一时，如图4c所示，根据PDSCH占有的3个时隙中最前面的时隙和DCI之间的时间间隔小于预定阈值K，则PDSCH在3个时隙中的QCL参数都根据距离最前面的时隙最近的时隙中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET的QCL参数(即slotn中CORESET0的QCL参数)获取PDSCH的QCL参数，PDSCH在3个时隙中的QCL参数保持不变。
当采用时间间隔获取方式一和QCL获取方式二时，如图4b所示，根据PDSCH占有的3个时隙中最前面的时隙和DCI之间的时间间隔小于预定阈值K，则PDSCH在3个时隙中的QCL参数根据距离每个时隙最近的时隙中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET的QCL参数获取PDSCH的QCL参数，PDSCH在3个时隙中的QCL参数可以不同，也可以相同。
当采用时间间隔获取方式二和QCL获取方式一时，如图4d所示，根据PDSCH占有的3个时隙中每个时隙和DCI之间的时间间隔和预定阈值K之间的关系，得到3个时隙中每个时隙的QCL参数是根据CORESET获取还是根据DCI指示的信息获取，当PDSCH的多个时隙和DCI之间的间隔都小于阈值K，则PDSCH在这多个时隙(即图4d中slotn，slotn+1)中QCL参数保持不变，根据距离这多个时隙中的最前面的时隙(即slotn)最近的时隙中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET的QCL参数获取PDSCH的QCL参数，slotn+2中的PDSCH和DCI之间的间隔大于K，则slotn+2中的PDSCH的QCL参数根据DCI指示的信息获取。
当采用时间间隔获取方式二和QCL获取方式二时，如图4a所示，根据PDSCH占有的3个时隙中每个时隙和DCI之间的时间间隔和预定阈值K之间的关系，得到3个时隙中每个时隙的QCL参数是根据CORESET获取还是根据DCI指示的信息获取，当PDSCH的多个时隙和DCI之间的间隔都小于阈值K，则PDSCH在这多个时隙(即图4d中slotn，slotn+1)中的每个时隙中的PDSCH的QCL参数，根据距离这个时隙中最近的时隙中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET的QCL参数获取PDSCH的QCL参数，slotn+2中的PDSCH和DCI 之间的间隔大于K，则slotn+2中的PDSCH的QCL参数根据DCI指示的信息获取，这个PDSCH在3个时隙中的每个时隙中判断其和调度CORESET0之间的间隔，当间隔小于K时，采用距离这个slot最近的时隙中最近的时隙中的最低CORESETID的CORESET的QCL参数获取PDSCH的QCL参数。当间隔大于K时，采用DCI中指示的QCL参数获取PDSCH的QCL参数。如图4a所示，slotn上采用slotn中的CORESET0的波束接收PDSCH，在slotn+1上采用slotn+1的CORESET1的波束接收PDSCH，slotn+2上采用slotn中的CORESET0中发送的DCI指示的QCL参数确定slotn+2上的接收波束。这是因为在K个时域符号中终端还没有解调出DCI，还要缓存PDSCH，而slotn的CORESET0和slotn+1的CORESET1都有可能给终端调度数据，终端在没有检出来DCI之前在slotn+1上需要缓存CORESET0和CORESET1中至少之一给他调度的PDSCH，当终端的接收能力有限，比如只能打出一个接收波束时，在DCI和PDSCH小于预定阈值的K范围内的每个时隙中PDSCH，采用距离这个时隙中的PDSCH最近的时隙中的最低CORESETID的CORESET获取QCL参数。
特别地当PDSCH和DCI之间的间隔大于1时，是A2个时隙对应一套QCL参数(如图4e所示)，还是A2个slot各自对应不同套的QCL参数(如图4f所示)，具体是哪种方式进一步基站和终端约定，或者基站通过信令信息通知。
具体时间间隔的获取方式和QCL参数的获取方式是采用哪种组合，可以终端和基站约定，也可以基站通过信令信息通知时哪种组合。
如图4a～4d中，K是26个时域符号，slotn上的CORESET0调度的PDSCH跨越3个时隙，即{slotn，slotn+1，slotn+2}。
在图4f中，当PDSCH和DCI之间的间隔大于预定阈值K的两个时隙中，DCI会为不同的时隙通知不同的QCL参数，从而DCI中需要为每个时隙配置对应的QCL参数，当然本实施例也不排除，基站在DCI中为多个时隙配置其中一个时隙的QCL参数(比如配置slotn+2中的QCL参数，即配置最前面的一个时隙中QCL参数)，其他时隙中的QCL参数通过高层信令配置，或者其他时隙中的QCL参数根据DCI配置的QCL参数得到，比如多个时隙中的采用轮询的方式，比如DCI和高层信令中至少之一通知的QCL参数只有两套，而PDSCH占有4个时隙，则这两套在这4个时隙中轮询。图4a～4f中，不同的QCL参数对应不同的波束。其中高层信令可以是RRC信令也可以是MAC-CE命令。该高层信令可以是通知DCI中的候选TCI state的高层信令，比如当DCI通知slotn+2 的TCI为TCI state2(DCI中通知TCI域包括3个比特，对应激活的8个TCI state)，则PDSCH在slotn+3中的TCI state对应TCI state3。
在本示例性实施例中一个PDSCH在占有多个时隙中可以是数据重复发送，也可以在多个时隙中发送不同的数据。
示例性实施例10
在本实施中，DCI中通知的TCI域中的一个state对应多个关系，不同关系对应PDSCH占有的不同时间单元或者不同时间单元集合，每个关系对应PDSCH占有的一个时间单元，或者一个时间单元集合，一个关系中包括Z个DMRS group和Z个RS Set之间的关系，Z个DMRS group和Z个RS Set之间一一对应，DMRS group和相对应的RS Set在所述对应的时间单元或者时间单元集合上，关于一种QCL参数集合满足QCL关系。
示例性实施例11
在本实施例中，当PDSCH/AP-CSI-RS的QCL参数根据距离PDSCH/AP-CSI-RS最近的slot中的最低CORESETID的CORESET的QCL参数获取时，进一步明确上述CORESET满足如下特征之一：
上述具有最低CORESETID的CORESET为上述时间单元中所有CC中包括的终端需要检测的所有CORESET中的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；
上述具有最低CORESETID的CORESET为上述时间单元中对应PCell中包括的终端需要检测的所有CORESET中的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；
上述具有最低CORESETID的CORESET为上述时间单元中对应PDSCH所在的serving cell中包括的终端需要检测的所有CORESET中的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；
上述具有最低CORESETID的CORESET为上述时间单元中对应调度PDSCH的DCI所在的serving cell中包括的终端需要检测的所有CORESET中的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；
上述具有最低CORESETID的CORESET为上述时间单元中预定CC(比如最低CCID的CC)所在的serving cell中包括的终端需要检测的所有CORESET中的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；
上述具有最低CORESETID的CORESET为上述时间单元中预定CC组中包括的终端需要检测的所有CORESET中的具有最低CORESETID的CORESET。
示例性实施例12
在本实施例中，一个CORESET的QCL参数和第一通信节点是否检测波束恢复响应信号之间有关联。
在一实施例中，基站给终端配置了一个COCRESET，在终端没有检测波束恢复响应信号的时候，这个CORESET的QCL参数基站通过信令告知终端，当终端需要检测波束恢复响应信号的时候(比如终端给基站发送了波束恢复请求信号之后4个时隙，终端在这个CORESET上检测基站的波束恢复响应信号，当超过预定时间窗，还没有成功检测到基站发的波束恢复响应信号，终端停止在这个CORESET上检测波束恢复请求信号)，这个CORESET的QCL参数根据终端发送的波束恢复请求信号中终端发现的波束获取。如图8a所示，在T1时间段中，CORESET1的QCL参数通过基站通知的信令信息获取，在T2时间段中终端开始在CORESET1上检测基站发送的波束恢复请求响应信号，CORESET1的QCL参数根据终端发送的波束恢复请求信号中包括的参考信号指示信息q new得到，其中q new表示终端在一个参考信号集合中选择的参考信号指示信息(也即表示终端新选择的波束)，在T3时间段，CORESET1的QCL参数通过基站发送的信令信息获得，其中T1时间段和T3时间段中，基站给终端发送的关于CORESET1的QCL参数的信令信息可以是不同的信令信息，即基站可以在T2时间段通过信令信息更新CORESET1的QCL参数。其中终端发送的波束恢复请求信号中终端发现的新波束通过终端发送的参考信号指示信息得到，其中参考信号指示信息表示终端在一个参考信号集合中选择的参考信号。其中所述参考信号包括测量参考信号和同步参考信号中的至少之一。
示例性实施例13
在本实施例中，调度非周期测量参考信号的物理层动态控制信令可以在非周期测量参考信号之后。
在一实施例中，所述非周期测量参考信号和所述物理动态控制信令在同一个时间单元中。
如图8b调度非周期测量参考信号的DCI所在的起始时域符号在非周期测量参考信号之后，图8c所示，调度非周期测量参考信号的DCI所在的部分时域符号在非周期测量参考信号之后，即比如DCI在3个时域符号上，CSI-RS在DCI所在的第一个时域符号上。
在示例性实施例中，所述TCI指示信息，用于指示DMRS group/CSI-RS port group和DL-RS set之间的QCL关系，即一个TCI索引信息对应一个state，一 个state中包括Q个DMRS group和Q个DL-RS set之间对应关系，一个DL-RS set中包括一个或者多个DL-RS，每个DL-RS关联一个QCL参数集合，表示所述DMRS group/CSI-RS port group中的参考信号和与其关联的DL-RS set中的一个DL-RS关于所述QCL参数集合满足QCL(quasi-co-location准共址)关系。两个参考信号关于一个QCL参数满足准共址关系，表示一个参考信号的所述QCL参数可以由两个参考信号的所述QCL参数获取，其中所述QCL参数包括如下参数至少之一：
多普勒频移(Doppler shift)，多普勒扩展(Doppler spread)，平均延迟(average delay)，延迟扩展(delay spread)，平均增益(average gain)，空域接收参数(Spatial Rx parameter)。
本示例性实施例中，两个参考信号是QCL的表示这两个参考信号至少关于空域接收参数是QCL的，这两个参考信号关于其他QCL参数是否QCL没有限制。
在示例性实施例中，信道也可以是一种信号，即在所述信道上传输信号。比如在数据信道上传输数据信号。
在示例性实施例中，不同的CC可以通过不同的Serving cell ID关联。
示例性实施例14
在本示例性实施例中，终端不希望收到满足如下特征的配置，相同时间符号上的PDSCH和CSI-RS关于接收空间参数不满足QCL关系。
在一实施例中，上述PDSCH和调度PDSCH的控制信令之间的间隔小于预定阈值K。
通过以上的实施方式的描述，本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到根据上述实施例的方法可借助软件加必需的通用硬件平台的方式来实现，当然也可以通过硬件，但很多情况下前者是更佳的实施方式。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对相关技术做出贡献的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质(如ROM/RAM、磁碟、光盘)中，包括若干指令用以使得一台终端设备(可以是手机，计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述的方法。
实施例3
在本实施例中还提供了一种控制信令的发送装置，该装置用于实现上述实施例及优选实施方式，已经进行过说明的不再赘述。如以下所使用的，术语“模 块”可以实现预定功能的软件和硬件中的至少之一的组合。尽管以下实施例所描述的装置较佳地以软件来实现，但是硬件，或者软件和硬件的组合的实现也是可能并被构想的。
图11是根据本申请实施例的控制信令的发送装置的结构框图，应用于第一通信节点，如图11所示，该装置包括：第一确定模块112和第一发送模块114。
1)第一确定模块112，设置为根据第一信息确定第二信息。
其中，该第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和该第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；该第一信息包括：该第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数。
2)第一发送模块114，设置为发送该第一控制信令。
通过图11所示装置，根据第一信息确定第二信息；其中，该第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和该第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；该第一信息包括：该第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数；发送该第一控制信令。也就是说，通过第二信息确定控制信令的格式，然后发送新的控制信令，克服了相关技术中，相关控制信令中部分资源被空置所造成的资源利用率较低的困难，达到了提高控制信令资源利用率的技术效果。
在一实施例中，在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系时，上述N的取值包括N1；在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第二关系时，上述N的取值包括N2；其中，N1、N2为整数。
其中，上述N1和上述N2之间的关系满足以下至少之一：上述N1大于上述N2；上述N1与上述N2的差值小于或者等于传输配置指示(Transmission configuration indication，TCI)域所占的比特数；上述N1与上述N2的差值小于或者等于通知第二传输参数信息所需要的比特数。
在一实施例中，在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预 定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系时，上述对应映射表格为第一对应映射表格；在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第二关系时，上述对应映射表格为第二对应映射表格。
在一实施例中，上述第一对应映射表格、上述第二对应映射表格、传输参数取值集合一以及传输参数取值集合二中的任一项通过以下方式至少之一确定：方式一、发送的信令信息所包括的内容；方式二、发送端和接收端预先约定的规则；其中，上述传输参数取值集合一对应上述第一对应映射表格中包括的上述第一传输参数的取值集合，上述传输参数取值集合二对应上述第二对应映射表格中包括的上述第一传输参数的取值集合。
在一个实施方式中，在上述第一传输参数的类型为TCI时，上述第一对应映射表格中每个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号(Down link reference signal，DL-RS)构成的DL-RS集合中只包括一个DL-RS；在上述第一传输参数类型为TCI时，上述第一对应映射表格中各个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号DL-RS构成的DL-RS集合中DL-RS两两之间关于空间接收参数满足准共址(quasi co-location，QCL)关系。
在上述第一传输参数类型为TCI时，上述第一对应映射表格中各个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号DL-RS构成的DL-RS集合中的DL-RS能被第一通信节点同时接收；在上述第一传输参数类型为TCI时，上述第一对应映射表格中各个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号DL-RS构成的DL-RS集合为空集；其中，上述第一通信节点为接收上述第一信号和上述第一控制信令中至少之一的通信节点。
在一实施例中，上述第一传输参数的类型为上述第一控制信令中包括的除TCI传输参数类型之外的一个或者多个传输参数类型；或者，上述第一传输参数类型为TCI传输参数。
在一实施例中，上述第一传输参数满足以下至少之一：上述第一传输参数为上述第一信号的传输参数；上述第一传输参数为第二信号的传输参数。
在一实施例中，上述第一信号或者上述第二信号包括以下信号至少之一：解调参考信号、测量参考信号、控制信道信号、以及数据信道信号；上述第一控制信令为物理层控制信令。
在一个实施方式中，上述第一信息还包括以下信息至少之一：第二控制信令中包括的信息；上述第一控制信令所在的控制资源集合(control resource set， CORESET)对应的传输配置指示(transmission configuration indication，TCI-PresentInDCI)是否使能信息；上述第一信号或者上述第二信号所在的载频与预定阈值G之间的关系；第一通信节点反馈的支持的频率范围能力；上述预设阈值K是否为0；第一通信节点需要检测的CORESET中是否至少存在一个配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与上述第一通信节点需要检测专有搜索空间关联的CORESET集合中是否至少存在一个配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与上述第一信号或者上述第二信号距离最近的时间单元中具有最低控制资源集合标识(control resource set identity，CORESETID)的CORESET是否配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与上述第一信号或者上述第二信号距离最近的时域符号中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET是否配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与上述第一信号或者上述第二信号关联的TCI状态池中是否至少存在一个TCI状态，其中，上述TCI状态中与参考信号集合参考结合reference RS set对应的QCL参数中包括空间接收参数；与上述第一信号或者第二信号关联的激活TCI状态池中，是否至少存在一个TCI状态，上述TCI状态中于所述参考信号集合reference RS set对应的QCL参数中包括空间接收参数；其中，上述第一通信节点为接收上述第一信号和上述第二信号中至少之一的通信节点。
在一实施例中，在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系时，上述第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的上述第一传输参数的类型为第一类型传输参数；在上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第二关系时，上述第二控制信令中预定指示域所通知的上述第一传输参数的类型为第二类型传输参数。
在一实施例中，在上述第一控制信令和上述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔小于上述预定阈值K时，上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为上述第一关系，在上述控制信令和上述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值K时，上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为上述第二关系；或者，在上述控制信令和上述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔小于或者等于上述预定阈值K时，上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为上述第一关系，在上述控制信令和上述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔大于上述预定阈值K时，上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为上述第二关系；或者，在上述控制信令和上述第一信号之 间的传输时间间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值K时，上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系，在上述控制信令和上述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔小于上述预定阈值K时，上述关系为上述第二关系。
在本实施例中还提供了一种控制信令的接收装置，图12是根据本申请实施例的控制信令的接收装置的结构框图，应用于第二通信节点，如图12所示，该装置包括：第二确定模块122和接收模块124。
1)第二确定模块122，设置为根据第一信息确定第二信息。
2)接收模块124，设置为根据上述第二信息接收第一控制信令。
其中，上述第二信息为根据第一信息确定的信息；其中，上述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和上述第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；上述第一信息包括：上述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数。
需要说明的是，上述各个模块是可以通过软件或硬件来实现的，对于后者，可以通过以下方式实现，但不限于此：上述模块均位于同一处理器中；或者，上述各个模块以任意组合的形式分别位于不同的处理器中。
实施例4
在本实施例中还提供了一种信息的确定装置，该装置用于实现上述实施例及优选实施方式，已经进行过说明的不再赘述。如以下所使用的，术语“模块”可以实现预定功能的软件和硬件中至少之一的组合。尽管以下实施例所描述的装置较佳地以软件来实现，但是硬件，或者软件和硬件的组合的实现也是可能并被构想的。
图13是根据本申请实施例的信息的确定装置的结构框图，应用于第一通信节点，如图13所示，该装置包括：第三确定模块132。
第三确定模块132，设置为根据第一信息确定第二信息。
其中，该第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一信号的准共址QCL参数；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的发送方式；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的接收方式；其中，该第一信息包括以下信息至少之一：特定控制资源集 合CORESET之后预定时间窗中是否存在该第二信号，该第一信号和特定CORESET之间的间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，该第二信号和特定CORESET之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，该第一信号和第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，该第二信号和第二控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，第一信号对应的第一空间接收参数和第二信号对应的第二空间接收参数之间的关系，其中X1、X2为实数。
通过图13所示装置，也即通过信号和控制信道资源，或者信号和调度信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值之间的关系，确定两个信号之间的复用问题，或者两个信号的接收问题，解决了相关技术中终端检测控制信令存在延迟，以及同一时刻打出的射频波束有限所导致的无法正确接收信号的问题。
在一个实施方式中，上述特定CORESET满足以下特征至少之一：上述CORESET是距离上述第一信号最近的时域符号中具有最低控制资源集合标识CORESET ID的CORESET；上述CORESET是距离上述第一信号最近的时间单元中具有最低CORESET ID的CORESET；在上述CORESET中终端需要检测调度下行信号和信道的下行控制信息DCI中的至少之一；在上述CORESET中不包括调度上述第一信号的控制信令信息；在上述CORESET中包括调度上述第二信号的控制信令信息；上述CORESET至少与一个专有搜索空间关联；上述CORESET是距离上述第一信号和上述第二信号中的至少之一最近的时间单元中的所有载波单元CC具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；上述CORESET是距离上述第一信号和上述第二信号中的至少之一最近的时间单元中的预定CC中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；上述CORESET是距离上述第一信号和上述第二信号中的至少之一最近的时间单元中的预定CC组中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；上述CORESET是一个时间单元中预定M个时域符号中的CORESET，其中，M小于或者等于上述时间单元中包括的时域符号个数。
在一实施例中，在上述第一信号和上述CORESET之间的时间间隔小于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号的QCL参数根据上述CORESET的QCL参数获取；在上述第一信号和上述CORESET之间的间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号的QCL参数通过上述第一信号的配置信息中配置的QCL参数获取。
在一实施例中，在上述第一信号和上述CORESET之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号的QCL参数优先级高于上述第二信号的QCL参数； 在上述第一信号和上述CORESET之间的间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号的QCL参数优先级低于上述第二信号的QCL参数。
在一实施例中，在上述第一信号和上述CORESET之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号和上述第二信号之间不允许采用频分复用的方式；在上述第一信号和上述CORESET之间的间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号和上述第二信号允许采用频分复用的方式。
在一实施例中，上述第一信号和上述第二信号中的至少之一包括以下信号至少之一：下行测量参考信号、下行同步信号、下行解调参考信号、下行数据信道信号、以及下行控制信道信号。
在一实施例中，上述预定阈值X1与预定阈值X2相等；和/或上述第二信号的QCL参数根据调度上述第二信号的控制信息和上述第二信号之间的间隔与上述预定阈值X2之间的关系确定。
在一实施例中，上述第一信号满足如下特征至少之一：上述第一信号为物理层动态控制信令调度的下行信号；上述第一信号为下行物理控制信道信号；调度上述第一信号的控制信令和上述第一信号之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1。
在一实施例中，上述第二信号满足以下特征至少之一：调度上述第二信号的控制信令在上述第一信号所在的时域符号之前；调度上述第二信号的控制信令和上述第一信号所在的时域符号之间的间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值X3；调度上述第二信号的控制信令和上述第二信号所在的起始时域符号之间的间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值X3；上述第二信号是物理层动态控制信令调度的下行信号；上述第二信号为周期下行测量参考信号；其中X3为实数。
在一实施例中，在上述CORESET之后预定时间窗中存在上述第二信号时，上述第一信号的QCL参数根据上述第二信号的QCL参数确定；在上述CORESET之后预定时间窗中不存在上述第二信号时，上述第一信号的QCL参数不根据上述第二信号的QCL参数确定；和/或在上述CORESET之后预定时间窗中存在上述第二信号，上述第一信号和调度上述第一信号的控制信令之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号的QCL参数不根据上述CORESET的QCL参数获取；在上述CORESET之后预定时间窗中不存在上述第二信号，上述第一信号和调度上述第一信号的控制信令之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号的QCL参数根据CORESET的QCL参数获取。
在一实施例中，上述第一信号和上述第二信号之间满足以下特征至少之一：上述第二信号的空间接收参数和上述第一信号的空间接收参数不同；上述第二信号的空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器和上述第一信号的空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器在第一通信节点不能同时打出；上述第二信号和上述第一信号属于不同的CC；上述第一信号所在的时域位置和上述第二信号所在的时域位置之间的交集为非空集合；上述第一信号和上述第二信号在相同的时域位置上；上述第二信号的优先级高于上述第一信号的优先级。
在一实施例中，在上述第二信息为上述第一信号的准共址QCL参数时，上述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括：根据上述第一信息确定如下信息至少之一：上述第一信号和上述第二信号的QCL参数之间的优先级；上述第一信号的配置信息中配置的QCL参数和特定CORESET的QCL参数之间的优先级；当上述第一信号和调度上述第一信号的控制信令之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1时，上述第一信号的QCL参数是否根据特定CORESET的QCL参数获取。
在一实施例中，在上述第二信息为第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的接收方式时，上述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括根据上述第一信息确定如下信息至少之一：是否在上述第二信号所在的时域位置上接收上述第一信号；是否在上述第二信号所在的时域位置上检测控制信道；在上述第二信号所在的时域位置上，上述第一信号的QCL参数和上述第二信号的QCL参数之间的优先级；上述第一信号和上述第二信号之间能否频分复用；上述第一信号可在的时域位置是否包括第二信号所在的时域位置。
在一实施例中，在上述第二信息为第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的发送方式时，上述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括根据上述第一信息确定如下信息至少之一：是否在上述第二信号所在的时域位置上发送上述第一信号；是否在上述第二信号所在的时域位置上发送控制信道；在上述第二信号所在的时域位置上，上述第一信号的QCL参数和上述第二信号的QCL参数之间的优先级；上述第一信号和上述第二信号之间能否频分复用；上述第一信号可在的时域位置是否包括第二信号所在的时域位置。
在一实施例中，上述第二信号所在的时域位置包括如下时域位置之一：上述第二信号所在的时域符号；上述第二信号所在的时间单位。
在一实施例中，上述方法还包括：不接收满足以下特征的配置：当调度上述第一信号的上述第一控制信令和上述第一信号之间的间隔大于或者等于上述 预定阈值X1，调度上述第二信号的上述第二控制信令和上述第二信号之间的间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值X2时，上述第一信号和上述第二信号关于空间接收参数不满足QCL关系；当调度上述第一信号的上述第一控制信令和上述第一信号之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1，调度上述第二信号的上述第二控制信令和上述第二信号之间的间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值X2时，上述第一信号的QCL参数根据上述第二信号的QCL参数确定；当调度上述第一信号的上述第一控制信令和上述第一信号之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1，调度上述第二信号的上述第二控制信令和上述第二信号之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X2时，上述第一信号的QCL参数和上述第二信号的QCL参数的优先级根据约定规则或者信令信息获取。
在一实施例中，上述第一信息还包括以下信息至少之一：上述特定CORESET中包括的控制信令中是否包括传输配置指示TCI指示域；上述第一信号和上述第二信号中的至少之一所在的载频与预定阈值G之间的关系；上述预设阈值X1和上述预定阈值X2中的至少之一是否为0；特定CORESET中是否至少存在一个配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；上述第一通信节点需要检测的CORESET集合中是否至少存在一个配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与上述第一信号或者上述第二信号关联的TCI状态池中是否至少存在一个TCI状态，其中，上述TCI状态中与参考信号集合对应的QCL参数中包括空间接收参数；与上述第一信号或者第二信号关联的激活TCI状态池中，是否至少存在一个TCI状态，上述TCI状态中与上述参考信号集合对应的QCL参数中包括空间接收参数；其中，上述第一通信节点为接收上述第一信号的通信节点。
在一实施例中，在上述第一信息为第一信号对应的第一空间接收参数和第二信号对应的第二空间接收参数之间的关系时，上述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括如下方式至少之一：上述第一信号和上述第二信号关于空间接收参数满足QCL关系时，上述第一信号可在的时域符号包括上述第二信号所在的时域符号；上述第一信号和上述第二信号关于空间接收参数不满足QCL关系时，上述第一信号可在的时域符号不包括上述第二信号所在的时域符号；在上述第一空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器和上述第二空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器第一通信节点能同时产生时，上述第一信号可在的时域符号包括上述第二信号所在的时域符号；在上述第一空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器和上述第二空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器第一通信节点不能同时产生时，上述第一信号可在的时 域符号不包括上述第二信号所在的时域符号。
需要说明的是，上述第一信号可在的时域符号不包括上述第二信号所在的时域符号可以为在第二信号所在的时域符号位置上，不发送和/或不接收所述第一信号做速率匹配。
在一实施例中，在上述第一信息为上述第一信号和第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，上述第二信息为第一信号的准共址QCL参数时，上述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括以下至少之一：上述第一信号在一个时间单元的不同时域符号上，上述QCL参数保持不变；上述第一信号在不同时间单元上，上述QCL参数可以不同；上述第一信号B1套QCL参数和A个时间单元之间存在对应关系；在上述第一信号所在的A个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的上述第一信号的QCL参数根据距离该时间单元最近的时间单元中具有预定特征的CORESET的QCL参数获取；在上述第一信号所在的A个时间单元中根据每个时间单元中上述第一信号和上述第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与上述预定阈值X1之间的关系，确定该时间单元中上述第一信号的QCL参数；其中，上述第一信号占有A个时间单元中，A为大于1的自然数，其中B1为小于或者等于A的非负整数。
需要说明的是，上述时间单元可以是一个时隙，也可以是一个子帧，或者其他时间单元。
在一实施例中，在上述第一信息为上述第一信号和第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，上述第二信息为第一信号的准共址QCL参数时，上述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括以下至少之一：根据A个时间单元中最前面的一个时间单元中上述第一信号和上述第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与上述预定阈值X1之间的关系，确定上述第一信号的QCL参数，上述第一信号在上述A个时间单元中的QCL参数保持不变；在上述第一信号所在的A1个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的上述第一信号的QCL参数根据距离该时间单元最近的时间单元中具有预定特征的CORESET的QCL参数获取，其中上述A1个时间单元中的最后一个时间单元中的上述第一信号和上述第一控制信令之间的间隔小于上述预定阈值X1；在上述第一信号所在的A2个时间单元中上述第一信号的QCL参数保持不变；上述第一信号B2套QCL参数和上述A2个时间单元之间存在对应关系；在上述第一信号所在的A2个时间单元中上述第一信号的QCL参数保持不变，在上述第一信号在上述A2个时间单元中的QCL参数根 据上述第一控制信令通知的信息确定，其中上述A2个时间单元中最前面的时间单元中的上述第一信号和上述第一控制信令之间的间隔大于或者等于上述预定阈值X1；其中，上述第一信号占有A个时间单元中，A为大于1的自然数，A1，A2为小于或者等于上述A值的非负整数，B2为小于或者等于A2的非负整数。
需要说明的是，上述各个模块是可以通过软件或硬件来实现的，对于后者，可以通过以下方式实现，但不限于此：上述模块均位于同一处理器中；或者，上述各个模块以任意组合的形式分别位于不同的处理器中。
实施例5
本申请的实施例还提供了一种存储介质，该存储介质中存储有计算机程序，其中，该计算机程序被设置为运行时执行上述任一项方法实施例中的步骤。
在一实施例中，在本实施例中，上述存储介质可以被设置为存储用于执行以下步骤S1和S2的计算机程序。
在步骤S1中，根据第一信息确定第二信息。
其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和所述第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；所述第一信息包括：所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数。
在步骤S2中，发送所述第一控制信令。
在一实施例中，存储介质还被设置为存储用于执行以下步骤S1的计算机程序。
在步骤S1中，根据第一信息确定第二信息；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一信号的准共址QCL参数；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的发送方式；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的接收方式；其中，所述第一信息包括以下信息至少之一：特定控制资源集合CORESET之后预定时间窗中是否存在所述第二信号，所述第一信号和特定CORESET之间的间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，所述第二信号和特定CORESET之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，所述第一信号和第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，所述第二信号和第二控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，第一信号对应的第一空间接收参数和第二信号对应的第二空间接 收参数之间的关系，其中X1、X2为实数。
在一实施例中，存储介质还被设置为存储用于执行以下步骤S1和步骤S2的计算机程序。
在步骤S1中，根据第一信息确定第二信息。
在步骤S2中，根据所述第二信息接收第一控制信令；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和所述第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；所述第一信息包括：所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数。
在一实施例中，在本实施例中，上述存储介质可以包括但不限于：U盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)、移动硬盘、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储计算机程序的介质。
本申请的实施例还提供了一种电子装置，包括存储器和处理器，该存储器中存储有计算机程序，该处理器被设置为运行计算机程序以执行上述任一项方法实施例中的步骤。
在一实施例中，上述电子装置还可以包括传输设备以及输入输出设备，其中，该传输设备和上述处理器连接，该输入输出设备和上述处理器连接。
在一实施例中，在本实施例中，上述处理器可以被设置为通过计算机程序执行以下步骤S1和步骤S2。
在步骤S1中，根据第一信息确定第二信息。其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和所述第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；所述第一信息包括：所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数。
在步骤S2中，发送所述第一控制信令。
在一实施例中，上述处理器还被设置为存储用于执行以下步骤S1的计算机程序：
在步骤S1中，根据第一信息确定第二信息；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一信号的准共址QCL参数；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的发送方式；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的接收方式；其中，所述第一信息包括以下信息至少之一：特定控制资源集合CORESET之后预定时间窗中是否存在所述第二信号，所述第一信号和特定CORESET之间的间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，所述第二信号和特定CORESET之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，所述第一信号和第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，所述第二信号和第二控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，第一信号对应的第一空间接收参数和第二信号对应的第二空间接收参数之间的关系，其中X1、X2为实数。
在一实施例中，上述电子装置还被设置为存储用于执行以下步骤S1和步骤S2的计算机程序。
在步骤S1中，根据第一信息确定第二信息。
在步骤S2中，根据所述第二信息接收第一控制信令；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和所述第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；所述第一信息包括：所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数。
在一实施例中，本实施例中的具体示例可以参考上述实施例及可选实施方式中所描述的示例，本实施例在此不再赘述。
实施例6
本申请的实施例还提供了一种准共址参考信号的确定方法，如图14所示，包括以下步骤S1401和步骤S1402中的至少之一：
在步骤S1401中，一个信号占有的时间单元个数A大于1时，根据信令信息和预定规则中的至少之一，确定所述一个信号的准共址参考信号。
在步骤S1402中，同一时刻的N个信号之间至少关于空间接收参数满足准共址关系，其中，N为大于或者等于2的正整数。
其中，所述一个信号包括以下任意一个：数据信道信号，控制信道信号，或参考信号。所述确定所述一个信号的准共址参数包括：获取准共址参考信号， 根据准共址参考信号获取准共址参数。
在一实施例中，“同一时刻的N个信号之间关于空间接收参数满足准共址关系”表示如下至少之一：通信节点不希望收到同一个时刻的N个信号之间关于空间接收参数不满足准共址关系的配置信息；N个信号之间关于空间接收参数满足准共址关系时，所述N个信号才可以在同一个时刻，否则不能在同一个时刻。
在一实施例中，所述一个信号是一个控制信令中调度的占有A个时间单元的信号，所述一个信号在A个时间单元中可以是重复传输，也可以是非重复传输。
在一实施例中，所述同一时刻的N个信号之间至少关于空间接收滤波参数满足准共址关系，包括以下至少之一：所述N个信号包括不同CC中的下信号；以及，所述N个信号包括如下信号中的至少两个信号：数据信道信号，控制信道信号，下行测量参考信号，以及解调参考信号。
在一实施例中，所述一个信号占有的时间单元个数A大于1时，根据信令信息和预定规则中的至少之一，确定所述一个信号的准共址参考信号，包括以下至少之一：所述一个信号在一个时间单元的不同时域符号上，所述准共址参考信号保持不变；所述一个信号在不同时间单元上，所述准共址参考信号可以不同；所述一个信号B1套准共址参考信号和A个时间单元之间存在对应关系；在所述一个信号所在的A个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的所述一个信号的准共址参考信号根据距离该时间单元最近的时间单元中具有预定特征的CORESET的准共址参考信号获取；在所述一个信号所在的A个时间单元中的每个时间单元中，根据该时间单元中所述一个信号和调度一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，确定该时间单元中所述一个信号的准共址参考信号；其中B1为小于或者等于所述A的非负整数，所述X1为非负数或所述X1为非负整数个时域符号数。
在一实施例中，所述一个信号占有的时间单元个数A大于1时，根据信令信息和预定规则中的至少之一，确定所述一个信号的准共址参考信号，包括以下至少之一：
根据A个时间单元中最前面的一个时间单元中的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，确定所述一个信号的准共址参考信号，所述一个信号在所述A个时间单元中的准共址参考信 号保持不变；
在所述一个信号所在的A1个时间单元中的每个时间单元的所述一个信号的准共址参考信号根据距离该时间单元最近的时间单元中具有预定特征的CORESET的准共址参考信号获取，其中所述A1个时间单元中的最后一个时间单元中的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的间隔小于预定阈值X1；
在所述一个信号所在的A2个时间单元中所述一个信号的准共址参考信号保持不变；
所述一个信号B2套准共址参考信号和所述A2个时间单元之间存在对应关系；
在所述一个信号在所述A2个时间单元中的准共址参考信号根据调度所述第一信号的控制信令中通知的信息确定，其中所述A2个时间单元中最前面的时间单元中的所述一个信号和所述控制信令之间的间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X1；
其中，A1，A2为小于或者等于所述A值的非负整数，B2为小于或者等于A2的非负整数。
在一实施例中，所述一个信号占有的时间单元个数A大于1时，根据信令信息和预定规则中的至少之一，确定所述一个信号的准共址参考信号，包括：所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔小于预定阈值X1时，根据距离所述一个信号最近的时间单元中的满足预定特征的控制信道资源的准共址参考信号获取所述一个信号的准共址参考信号，其中所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔包括如下之一：
所述A个时间单元中最前面的一个时间单元中的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔；
所述一个信号所在的A个时间单元中的每个时间单元的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔。
在一实施例中，所述根据距离所述一个信号最近的时间单元中的满足预定特征的控制信道资源的准共址参考信号获取所述一个信号的准共址参考信号，包括如下之一：
在所述一个信号所在的A1个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的所述一个信号的准共址参考信号根据距离该时间单元中的所述一个信号最近的时间单元中 具有预定特征的控制信道资源的准共址参考信号获取；
在所述一个信号所在的A1个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的所述一个信号的准共址参考信号根据距离所述A个时间单元中最前面的时间单元中的所述一个信号最近的时间单元中具有预定特征的控制信道资源的准共址参考信号获取；
其中所述A1个时间单元为所述一个信号占有的所述A个时间单元，或者所述A1个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔小于预定阈值X1。
在一实施例中，所述一个信号占有的时间单元个数A大于1时，根据信令信息和预定规则中的至少之一，确定所述一个信号的准共址参考信号，包括如下至少之一：
所述一个信号的B2套准共址参考信号和A2个时间单元之间存在对应关系；
所述一个信号的B2套准共址参考信号在所述A2个时间单元中以轮询方式对应；
调度所述一个信号的控制信令中包括B3个关系，所述一个关系对应所述A个时间单元中一个时间单元集合，所述一个关系包括Z个DMRS group和Z个RS Set之间的关系，其中Z为大于或者等于1的正整数；
其中所述B2套准共址参考信号包括在调度所述一个信号的控制信令中，或所述B2套准共址参考信号中的B4套包括在调度所述一个信号的控制信令中，所述B2套准共址参考信号中的B5套包括在高层信令中，其中，所述B2与所述B3为小于或者等于A2的非负整数；
其中所述A2个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X1，或者所述A2个时间单元为所述一个信号占有的所述A个时间单元。
其中，TCI用于通知所述信号的准共址参考信号，所述信号的QCL参数根据所述信号的准共址参考信号获取。
其中，所述一套准共址参考信号包括至少一个RS set参考信号集合，每个RS set和一个DMRS group之间存在QCL关系。
实施例7
本申请的实施例还提供了一种准共址参考信号的确定装置，包括以下模块至少之一：
信号确定模块152，设置为在一个信号占有的时间单元个数A大于1时，根据信令信息和预定规则中的至少之一，确定所述一个信号的准共址参考信号。
关系满足模块154，设置为同一时刻的N个信号之间关于空间接收参数满足准共址关系，其中，N为大于或者等于2的正整数。
在一实施例中，所述关系满足模块154还设置为：不同CC中的下行信号；如下信号中的至少两个信号：数据信道信号，控制信道信号，下行测量参考信号，以及解调参考信号。
在一实施例中，所述信号确定模块152还设置为以下至少之一：所述一个信号在一个时间单元的不同时域符号上，所述准共址参考信号保持不变；所述一个信号在不同时间单元上，所述准共址参考信号可以不同；所述一个信号的B1套准共址参考信号和A个时间单元之间存在对应关系；在所述一个信号所在的A个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的所述一个信号的准共址参考信号根据距离该时间单元最近的时间单元中具有预定特征的CORESET的准共址参考信号获取；在所述一个信号所在的A个时间单元中的每个时间单元中，根据该时间单元中所述一个信号和调度一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，确定该时间单元中所述一个信号的准共址参考信号；其中B1为小于或者等于A的非负整数，X1为非负数或X1为非负整数个时域符号数。
在一实施例中，所述信号确定模块152还设置为以下至少之一：
根据A个时间单元中最前面的一个时间单元中的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，确定所述一个信号的准共址参考信号，所述一个信号在所述A个时间单元中的准共址参考信号保持不变；
在所述一个信号所在的A1个时间单元中的每个时间单元的所述一个信号的准共址参考信号根据距离该时间单元最近的时间单元中具有预定特征的CORESET的准共址参考信号获取，其中所述A1个时间单元中的最后一个时间单元中的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的间隔小于预定阈值X1；
在所述一个信号所在的A2个时间单元中所述一个信号的准共址参考信号保持不变；
所述一个信号的B2套准共址参考信号和所述A2个时间单元之间存在对应关系；
所述一个信号在所述A2个时间单元中的准共址参考信号根据调度所述第一信号的控制信令中通知的信息确定，其中所述A2个时间单元中最前面的时间单元中的所述一个信号和所述控制信令之间的间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X1；
其中，A1，A2为小于或者等于A的非负整数，B2为小于或者等于A2的非负整数。
在一实施例中，信号确定模块152还设置为：所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔小于预定阈值X1时，根据距离所述一个信号最近的时间单元中的满足预定特征的控制信道资源的准共址参考信号获取所述一个信号的准共址参考信号，其中所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔包括如下之一：
所述A个时间单元中最前面的一个时间单元中的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔；
所述一个信号所在的A个时间单元中的每个时间单元的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔。
在一实施例中，所述根据距离所述一个信号最近的时间单元中的满足预定特征的控制信道资源的准共址参考信号获取所述一个信号的准共址参考信号，包括如下之一：
在所述一个信号所在的A1个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的所述一个信号的准共址参考信号根据距离该时间单元中的所述一个信号最近的时间单元中具有预定特征的控制信道资源的准共址参考信号获取；
在所述一个信号所在的A1个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的所述一个信号的准共址参考信号根据距离所述A个时间单元中最前面的时间单元中的所述一个信号最近的时间单元中具有预定特征的控制信道资源的准共址参考信号获取；
其中所述A1个时间单元为所述一个信号占有的所述A个时间单元，或者所述A1个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔小于预定阈值X1。
在一实施例中，所述信号确定模块152设置为以下至少之一：
所述一个信号的B2套准共址参考信号和A2个时间单元之间存在对应关系；
所述一个信号的B2套准共址参考信号在所述A2个时间单元中以轮询方式 对应；
调度所述一个信号的控制信令中包括B3个关系，所述一个关系对应所述A个时间单元中一个时间单元集合，所述一个关系包括Z个DMRS group和Z个RS Set之间的关系，其中Z为大于或者等于1的正整数；
其中所述B2套准共址参考信号包括在调度所述一个信号的控制信令中，或所述B2套准共址参考信号中的B4套包括在调度所述一个信号的控制信令中，所述B2套准共址参考信号中的B5套包括在高层信令中，
其中，所述B2与所述B3为小于或者等于所述A2的非负整数；
其中所述A2个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X1，或者所述A2个时间单元为所述一个信号占有的所述A个时间单元。
本申请的实施例还提供了一种存储介质，该存储介质中存储有计算机程序，其中，该计算机程序被设置为运行时执行上述任一项方法实施例中的步骤。
本申请的实施例还提供了一种电子装置，包括存储器和处理器，该存储器中存储有计算机程序，该处理器被设置为运行计算机程序以执行上述任一项方法实施例中的步骤。
显然，本领域的技术人员应该明白，上述的本申请的各模块或各步骤可以用通用的计算装置来实现，它们可以集中在单个的计算装置上，或者分布在多个计算装置所组成的网络上，在一实施例中，它们可以用计算装置可执行的程序代码来实现，从而，可以将它们存储在存储装置中由计算装置来执行，并且在某些情况下，可以以不同于此处的顺序执行所示出或描述的步骤，或者将它们分别制作成各个集成电路模块，或者将它们中的多个模块或步骤制作成单个集成电路模块来实现。这样，本申请不限制于任何特定的硬件和软件结合。

Claims (67)

  1. 一种信息的确定方法，包括：
    根据第一信息确定第二信息；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一信号的准共址QCL参数；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的发送方式；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的接收方式；其中，所述第一信息包括以下信息至少之一：特定控制资源集合CORESET之后预定时间窗中是否存在所述第二信号，所述第一信号和特定CORESET之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，所述第二信号和特定CORESET之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，所述第一信号和第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，所述第二信号和第二控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，第一信号对应的第一空间接收参数和第二信号对应的第二空间接收参数之间的关系，其中X1、X2为实数。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，
    在所述第一信号和所述特定CORESET之间的时间间隔小于所述预定阈值X1时，所述第一信号的QCL参数根据所述CORESET的QCL参数获取；
    在所述第一信号和所述特定CORESET之间的时间间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X1时，所述第一信号的QCL参数通过所述第一信号的配置信息中配置的QCL参数获取。
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，
    在所述第一信号和所述特定CORESET之间的时间间隔小于所述预定阈值X1时，所述第一信号的QCL参数优先级高于所述第二信号的QCL参数；
    在所述第一信号和所述特定CORESET之间的时间间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X1时，所述第一信号的QCL参数优先级低于所述第二信号的QCL参数。
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，
    在所述第一信号和所述特定CORESET之间的时间间隔小于所述预定阈值X1时，所述第一信号和所述第二信号之间不允许采用频分复用的方式；
    在所述第一信号和所述特定CORESET之间的时间间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X1时，所述第一信号和所述第二信号允许采用频分复用的方式。
  5. 根据权利要求2或3或4中任意一项所述的方法，其中，
    所述第二信号满足如下特征至少之一：所述第二信号包括物理层动态控制信令调度的下行信号；所述第二信号包括下行物理控制信道信号；调度所述第 二信号的控制信令和所述第一信号之间的时间间隔小于所述预定阈值X1；所述第二信号包括以下信号至少之一：下行数据信道信号和测量参考信号。
  6. 根据权利要求2-5中任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一信号满足如下特征至少之一：
    调度所述第一信号的控制信令在所述第二信号所在的时域符号之前；
    调度所述第一信号的控制信令和所述第二信号所在的时域符号之间的间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X3；
    调度所述第一信号的控制信令和所述第一信号所在的起始时域符号之间的间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X3；
    所述第一信号包括物理层动态控制信令调度的下行信号；
    所述第一信号包括周期下行测量参考信号；
    所述第一信号包括下行控制信道信号；
    其中，X3为实数。
  7. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，所述第一信号的QCL参数满足以下(i)和(ii)中至少之一：
    (i)在所述特定CORESET之后预定时间窗中存在所述第二信号时，所述第一信号的QCL参数根据所述第二信号的QCL参数确定；
    在所述特定CORESET之后预定时间窗中不存在所述第二信号时，所述第一信号的QCL参数不根据所述第二信号的QCL参数确定；和，
    (ii)在所述特定CORESET之后预定时间窗中存在所述第二信号，所述第一信号和调度所述第一信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔小于所述预定阈值X1时，所述第一信号的QCL参数不根据所述特定CORESET的QCL参数获取；
    在所述特定CORESET之后预定时间窗中不存在所述第二信号，所述第一信号和调度所述第一信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔小于所述预定阈值X1时，所述第一信号的QCL参数根据特定CORESET的QCL参数获取。
  8. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一信号和所述第二信号之间满足以下特征至少之一：
    所述第二信号的空间接收参数和所述第一信号的空间接收参数不同；
    所述第二信号的空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器和所述第一信号的空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器在第一通信节点不能同时打出；
    所述第二信号和所述第一信号属于不同的CC；
    所述第一信号所在的时域位置和所述第二信号所在的时域位置之间的交集为非空集合；
    所述第一信号和所述第二信号在相同的时域位置上；
    所述第二信号的优先级高于所述第一信号的优先级。
  9. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，在所述第二信息为所述第一信号的准共址QCL参数时，所述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括：根据所述第一信息确定如下信息至少之一：
    所述第一信号和所述第二信号的QCL参数之间的优先级；所述第一信号的配置信息中配置的QCL参数和特定CORESET的QCL参数之间的优先级；以及，当所述第一信号和调度所述第一信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔小于所述预定阈值X1时，所述第一信号的QCL参数是否根据特定CORESET的QCL参数获取。
  10. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，在所述第二信息为第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的接收方式时，所述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括根据所述第一信息确定如下信息至少之一：
    是否在所述第二信号所在的时域位置上接收所述第一信号；
    是否在所述第二信号所在的时域位置上检测控制信道，且所述第一信号为控制信道信号；
    在所述第二信号所在的时域位置上，所述第一信号的QCL参数和所述第二信号的QCL参数之间的优先级；
    所述第一信号和所述第二信号之间能否频分复用；以及，
    所述第一信号可在的时域位置是否包括第二信号所在的时域位置。
  11. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，在所述第二信息为第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的发送方式时，所述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括根据所述第一信息确定如下信息至少之一：
    是否在所述第二信号所在的时域位置上发送所述第一信号；
    是否在所述第二信号所在的时域位置上发送控制信道，且所述第一信号包括控制信道信号；
    在所述第二信号所在的时域位置上，所述第一信号的QCL参数和所述第二信号的QCL参数之间的优先级；
    所述第一信号和所述第二信号之间能否频分复用；
    所述第一信号可在的时域位置是否包括第二信号所在的时域位置。
  12. 根据权利要求1-11中任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第二信号所在的时域位置包括如下时域位置之一：
    所述第二信号所在的时域符号；
    所述第二信号所在的时间单位。
  13. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，还包括：
    不接收满足以下特征的配置：当调度所述第一信号的所述第一控制信令和所述第一信号之间的时间间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X1，且调度所述第二信号的所述第二控制信令和所述第二信号之间的时间间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X2时，所述第一信号和所述第二信号关于空间接收参数不满足QCL关系；
    当调度所述第一信号的所述第一控制信令和所述第一信号之间的间隔小于所述预定阈值X1，且调度所述第二信号的所述第二控制信令和所述第二信号之间的间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X2时，所述第一信号的QCL参数根据所述第二信号的QCL参数确定；
    当调度所述第一信号的所述第一控制信令和所述第一信号之间的间隔小于所述预定阈值X1，且调度所述第二信号的所述第二控制信令和所述第二信号之间的间隔小于所述预定阈值X2时，所述第一信号的QCL参数和所述第二信号的QCL参数的优先级根据约定规则或者信令信息获取。
  14. 根据权利要求1～13中的任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一信息还包括以下信息至少之一：
    所述特定CORESET中包括的控制信令中是否包括传输配置指示TCI指示域；所述第一信号和所述第二信号中至少之一所在的载频与预定阈值G之间的关系；所述预设阈值X1和所述预定阈值X2中至少之一是否为0；特定CORESET中是否至少存在一个配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；所述第一通信节点需要检测的CORESET集合中是否至少存在一个配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与所述第一信号或者所述第二信号关联的TCI状态池中是否至少存在一个TCI状态，其中，所述TCI状态中与参考信号集合对应的QCL参数中包括空间接收参数；以及与所述第一信号或者第二信号关联的激活TCI状态池中，是否至少存在一个TCI状态，所述TCI状态中与所述参考信号集合对应的QCL参数中包括空间接收参数；
    其中，所述第一通信节点为接收所述第一信号的通信节点。
  15. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，在所述第一信息为第一信号对应的第一空间接收参数和第二信号对应的第二空间接收参数之间的关系时，所述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括如下方式至少之一：
    所述第一信号和所述第二信号关于空间接收参数满足QCL关系时，所述第一信号可在的时域符号包括所述第二信号所在的时域符号；
    所述第一信号和所述第二信号关于空间接收参数不满足QCL关系时，所述第一信号可在的时域符号不包括所述第二信号所在的时域符号；
    在所述第一空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器和所述第二空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器第一通信节点能同时产生时，所述第一信号可在的时域符号包括所述第二信号所在的时域符号；
    在所述第一空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器和所述第二空间接收参数对应的空间滤波器第一通信节点不能同时产生时，所述第一信号可在的时域符号不包括所述第二信号所在的时域符号。
  16. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，在所述第一信息为所述第一信号和第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，且所述第二信息为第一信号的准共址QCL参数时，所述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括以下至少之一：
    所述第一信号在一个时间单元的不同时域符号上，所述QCL参数保持不变；
    所述第一信号在不同时间单元上，所述QCL参数可以不同；
    所述第一信号B1套QCL参数和A个时间单元之间存在对应关系；
    在所述第一信号所在的A个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的所述第一信号的QCL参数根据距离该时间单元最近的时间单元中具有预定特征的CORESET的QCL参数获取；
    在所述第一信号所在的A个时间单元中根据每个时间单元中所述第一信号和所述第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与所述预定阈值X1之间的关系，确定该时间单元中所述第一信号的QCL参数；
    其中，所述第一信号占有A个时间单元中，A为大于1的自然数，其中B1为小于或者等于A的非负整数。
  17. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，
    在所述第一信息为所述第一信号和第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈 值X1之间的关系，且所述第二信息为第一信号的准共址QCL参数时，所述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括以下至少之一：
    根据A个时间单元中最前面的一个时间单元中所述第一信号和所述第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与所述预定阈值X1之间的关系，确定所述第一信号的QCL参数，所述第一信号在所述A个时间单元中的QCL参数保持不变；
    在所述第一信号所在的A1个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的所述第一信号的QCL参数根据距离该时间单元最近的时间单元中具有预定特征CORESET的QCL参数获取，其中所述A1个时间单元中的最后一个时间单元中的所述第一信号和所述第一控制信令之间的时间间隔小于所述预定阈值X1；
    在所述第一信号所在的A2个时间单元中所述第一信号的QCL参数保持不变；
    所述第一信号B2套QCL参数和所述A2个时间单元之间存在对应关系；
    在所述第一信号所在的A2个时间单元中，所述第一信号的QCL参数保持不变，在所述第一信号在所述A2个时间单元中的QCL参数根据所述第一控制信令通知的信息确定，其中所述A2个时间单元中最前面的时间单元中的所述第一信号和所述第一控制信令之间的时间间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X1；
    其中，所述第一信号占有A个时间单元中，A为大于1的自然数，A1，A2为小于或者等于所述A值的非负整数，B2为小于或者等于A2的非负整数。
  18. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，
    在所述第一信息为所述第一信号和第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，且所述第二信息为第一信号的准共址QCL参数时，所述根据第一信息确定第二信息包括：所述第一信号的准共址QCL参数根据特定CORESET的解调参考信号的准共址参数获取，其中所述特定CORESET满足如下特征至少之一：
    所述特定CORESET是距离所述第一信号最近的时域符号中具有最低控制资源集合标识CORESET ID的CORESET；
    所述特定CORESET是距离所述第一信号最近的时间单元中具有最低CORESET ID的CORESET；
    在所述特定CORESET中终端需要检测调度下行信号和信道的下行控制信息DCI中的至少之一；
    在所述特定CORESET中不包括调度所述第一信号的控制信令信息；
    在所述特定CORESET中包括调度所述第二信号的控制信令信息；
    所述特定CORESET至少与一个专有搜索空间关联；
    所述特定CORESET是距离所述第一信号最近的时间单元中的所有载波单元CC具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；
    所述特定CORESET是距离所述第一信号最近的时间单元中的预定CC中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；
    所述特定CORESET是距离所述第一信号最近的时间单元中的预定CC组中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；
    所述特定CORESET是一个时间单元中预定M个时域符号中的CORESET，其中，M小于或者等于所述时间单元中包括的时域符号个数。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其中，所述CORESET是距离所述第一信号最近的时间单元中的预定CC中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET，所述预定CC包括如下之一：
    所述第一信号所在的CC，调度所述第一信号的控制信道所在的CC，以及所述第一信号所在的CC组中的主CC。
  20. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，在所述第一信息包括(i)所述第一信号和第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系和(ii)所述第二信号和第二控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，且所述第二信息包括所述第一信号的准共址QCL参考的情况下，满足如下特征至少之一：
    当调度所述第一控制信令和所述第一信号之间的时间间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X1，且调度所述第二控制信令和所述第二信号之间的间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X2时，所述第一信号和所述第二信号关于空间接收参数满足QCL关系；
    当调度所述第一控制信令和所述第一信号之间的时间间隔小于所述预定阈值X1，且调度所述第二控制信令和所述第二信号之间的间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X2时，所述第一信号的QCL参数根据所述第二信号的QCL参数确定；
    当调度所述第一控制信令和所述第一信号之间的时间间隔小于所述预定阈值X1，且调度所述第二控制信令和所述第二信号之间的间隔小于所述预定阈值X2时，所述第一信号的QCL参数和所述第二信号的QCL参数的优先级根据约定规则或者信令信息获取。
  21. 根据权利要求1～20中的任意一项所述的方法，其中，在所述第一信息 包括所述第一信号和所述第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系的情况下，所述第二信息还包括以下至少之一：
    在所述第一信号所在的时域符号集合和所述第二信号所在的时域符号集合的差集上，所述第一信号的接收方式；
    所述第一信号在一个时间单元中的不同时域符号上关于QCL参数满足QCL关系。
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法，其中，在所述第一信号所在的时域符号集合和所述第二信号所在的时域符号集合的差集上，所述第一信号的接收方式包括以下之一：
    在所述差集上所述第一信号的接收方式和交集上所述第一信号的接收方式相同；
    在所述差集上所述第一信号的接收方式和交集上所述第一信号的接收方式不同；
    在所述差集上，所述第一信号的接收方式根据距离所述第一信号最近的时间单元中特定CORESET的准共址参考信号获取所述第一信号的准共址参考信号；
    其中，所述交集为所述第一信号和所述第二信号占有的时域资源的交集。
  23. 根据权利要求1-22中任一项所述的方法，其中，所述特定CORESET满足以下特征至少之一：
    所述特定CORESET是距离所述第一信号最近的时域符号中具有最低控制资源集合标识CORESET ID的CORESET；
    所述特定CORESET是距离所述第一信号最近的时间单元中具有最低CORESET ID的CORESET；
    在所述特定CORESET中终端需要检测调度下行信号和信道的下行控制信息DCI中的至少之一；
    在所述特定CORESET中不包括调度所述第一信号的控制信令信息；
    在所述特定CORESET中包括调度所述第二信号的控制信令信息；
    所述特定CORESET至少与一个专有搜索空间关联；
    所述特定CORESET是距离所述第一信号和所述第二信号中至少之一最近的时间单元中的所有载波单元CC具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；
    所述特定CORESET是距离所述第一信号和所述第二信号中至少之一最近 的时间单元中的预定CC中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；
    所述特定CORESET是距离所述第一信号和所述第二信号中至少之一最近的时间单元中的预定CC组中具有最低CORESETID的CORESET；
    所述特定CORESET是一个时间单元中预定M个时域符号中的CORESET，其中，M小于或者等于所述时间单元中包括的时域符号个数。
  24. 根据权利要求1-22所述的方法，其中，所述第一信号和所述第二信号中至少之一包括以下信号至少之一：
    下行测量参考信号、下行同步信号、下行解调参考信号、下行数据信道信号、以及下行控制信道信号。
  25. 根据权利要求1或7-24中任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第二信号满足以下特征至少之一：
    调度所述第二信号的控制信令在所述第一信号所在的时域符号之前；
    调度所述第二信号的控制信令和所述第一信号所在的时域符号之间的间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X3；
    调度所述第二信号的控制信令和所述第二信号所在的起始时域符号之间的间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X3；
    所述第二信号包括物理层动态控制信令调度的下行信号；
    所述第二信号包括周期下行测量参考信号；
    其中X3为实数。
  26. 根据权利要求1或7-24中任一项所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一信号满足如下特征至少之一：所述第一信号包括物理层动态控制信令调度的下行信号；所述第一信号包括下行物理控制信道信号；调度所述第一信号的控制信令和所述第一信号之间的时间间隔小于所述预定阈值X1。
  27. 根据权利要求1～24中的任一项所述的方法，其中，所述QCL参数包括以下信息至少之一：
    多普勒频移，多普勒扩展，平均延迟，延迟扩展，平均增益，以及空域接收参数。
  28. 根据权利要求1～24中的任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一信号的空域接收参数根据所述第一信息获取，所述第一信号的其他QCL参数根据所述第一控制信令中包括的信息获取，其中，所述第一控制信令包括所述第一信号的调度信息。
  29. 一种准共址参考信号的确定方法，包括以下至少之一：
    一个信号占有的时间单元个数A大于1时，根据信令信息和预定规则中的至少之一，确定所述一个信号的准共址参考信号；以及
    同一时刻的N个信号之间关于空间接收参数满足准共址关系，其中，N为大于或者等于2的正整数。
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的方法，其中，所述同一时刻的N个信号包括以下至少之一：
    不同CC中的下行信号；
    如下信号中的至少两个信号：数据信道信号，控制信道信号，下行测量参考信号，以及解调参考信号。
  31. 根据权利要求29所述的方法，其中，所述一个信号占有的时间单元个数A大于1时，根据信令信息和预定规则中的至少之一，确定所述一个信号的准共址参考信号，包括以下至少之一：
    所述一个信号在一个时间单元的不同时域符号上，所述准共址参考信号保持不变；
    所述一个信号在不同时间单元上，所述准共址参考信号可以不同；
    所述一个信号的B1套准共址参考信号和A个时间单元之间存在对应关系；
    在所述一个信号所在的A个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的所述一个信号的准共址参考信号根据距离该时间单元最近的时间单元中具有预定特征的CORESET的准共址参考信号获取；
    在所述一个信号所在的A个时间单元中的每个时间单元中，根据该时间单元中所述一个信号和调度一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，确定该时间单元中所述一个信号的准共址参考信号；
    其中B1为小于或者等于A的非负整数，X1为非负数或X1为非负整数个时域符号数。
  32. 根据权利要求29所述的方法，其中，所述一个信号占有的时间单元个数A大于1时，根据信令信息和预定规则中的至少之一，确定所述一个信号的准共址参考信号，包括以下至少之一：
    根据A个时间单元中最前面的一个时间单元中的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，确定所述一个信号的准共址参考信号，所述一个信号在所述A个时间单元中的准共址参考信 号保持不变；
    在所述一个信号所在的A1个时间单元中的每个时间单元的所述一个信号的准共址参考信号根据距离该时间单元最近的时间单元中具有预定特征的CORESET的准共址参考信号获取，其中所述A1个时间单元中的最后一个时间单元中的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的间隔小于预定阈值X1；
    在所述一个信号所在的A2个时间单元中所述一个信号的准共址参考信号保持不变；
    所述一个信号的B2套准共址参考信号和所述A2个时间单元之间存在对应关系；
    所述一个信号在所述A2个时间单元中的准共址参考信号根据调度所述第一信号的控制信令中通知的信息确定，其中所述A2个时间单元中最前面的时间单元中的所述一个信号和所述控制信令之间的间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X1；
    其中，A1，A2为小于或者等于A的非负整数，B2为小于或者等于A2的非负整数。
  33. 根据权利要求29所述的方法，其中，所述一个信号占有的时间单元个数A大于1时，根据信令信息和预定规则中的至少之一，确定所述一个信号的准共址参考信号，包括：所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔小于预定阈值X1时，根据距离所述一个信号最近的时间单元中的满足预定特征的控制信道资源的准共址参考信号获取所述一个信号的准共址参考信号，其中所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔包括如下之一：
    所述A个时间单元中最前面的一个时间单元中的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔；
    所述一个信号所在的A个时间单元中的每个时间单元的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔。
  34. 根据权利要求33所述方法，其中，所述根据距离所述一个信号最近的时间单元中的满足预定特征的控制信道资源的准共址参考信号获取所述一个信号的准共址参考信号，包括如下之一：
    在所述一个信号所在的A1个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的所述一个信 号的准共址参考信号根据距离该时间单元中的所述一个信号最近的时间单元中具有预定特征的控制信道资源的准共址参考信号获取；
    在所述一个信号所在的A1个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的所述一个信号的准共址参考信号根据距离所述A个时间单元中最前面的时间单元中的所述一个信号最近的时间单元中具有预定特征的控制信道资源的准共址参考信号获取；
    其中所述A1个时间单元为所述一个信号占有的所述A个时间单元，或者所述A1个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔小于预定阈值X1。
  35. 根据权利要求29或33所述的方法，其中，所述一个信号占有的时间单元个数A大于1时，根据信令信息和预定规则中的至少之一，确定所述一个信号的准共址参考信号，包括如下至少之一：
    所述一个信号的B2套准共址参考信号和A2个时间单元之间存在对应关系；
    所述一个信号的B2套准共址参考信号在所述A2个时间单元中以轮询方式对应；
    调度所述一个信号的控制信令中包括B3个关系，所述一个关系对应所述A个时间单元中一个时间单元集合，所述一个关系包括Z个DMRS group和Z个RS Set之间的关系，其中Z为大于或者等于1的正整数；
    其中所述B2套准共址参考信号包括在调度所述一个信号的控制信令中，或所述B2套准共址参考信号中的B4套包括在调度所述一个信号的控制信令中，所述B2套准共址参考信号中的B5套包括在高层信令中；
    其中，所述B2与所述B3为小于或者等于所述A2的非负整数；
    其中，所述A2个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的所述一个信号和调度所述一个信号的控制信令之间的时间间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值X1，或者所述A2个时间单元为所述一个信号占有的所述A个时间单元。
  36. 一种控制信令的发送方法，包括：
    根据第一信息确定第二信息；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和所述第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；所述第一信息包括：所述第一控制信令和 第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数；
    发送所述第一控制信令。
  37. 根据权利要求36所述的方法，其中，
    在所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系时，所述N的取值包括N1；
    在所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第二关系时，所述N的取值包括N2；
    其中，N1、N2为整数。
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的方法，其中，所述N1和所述N2之间的关系满足以下至少之一：
    所述N1大于所述N2；
    所述N1与所述N2的差值小于或者等于传输配置指示TCI域所占的比特数；
    所述N1与所述N2的差值小于或者等于通知第二传输参数所需要的比特数。
  39. 根据权利要求36所述的方法，其中，
    在所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系时，所述对应映射表格为第一对应映射表格；
    在所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第二关系时，所述对应映射表格为第二对应映射表格。
  40. 根据权利要求39所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一对应映射表格、所述第二对应映射表格、传输参数取值集合一以及传输参数取值集合二中的任一项通过以下方式至少之一确定：
    方式一、发送的信令信息所包括的内容；
    方式二、与接收端预先约定的规则；
    其中，所述传输参数取值集合一对应所述第一对应映射表格中包括的所述第一传输参数的取值集合，所述传输参数取值集合二对应所述第二对应映射表格中包括的所述第一传输参数的取值集合，其中所述接收端为接收所述第一控制信令的通信节点。
  41. 根据权利要求39所述的方法，其中，所述方法满足以下之一：
    在所述第一传输参数的类型为TCI时，所述第一对应映射表格中每个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号DL-RS构成的DL-RS集合中只包括一个DL-RS；
    在所述第一传输参数类型为TCI时，所述第一对应映射表格中每个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号DL-RS构成的DL-RS集合中DL-RS两两之间关于空间接收参数满足准共址QCL关系；
    在所述第一传输参数类型为TCI时，所述第一对应映射表格中每个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号DL-RS构成的DL-RS集合中的DL-RS能被第一通信节点同时接收；
    在所述第一传输参数类型为TCI时，所述第一对应映射表格中每个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号DL-RS构成的DL-RS集合为空集；
    其中，所述第一通信节点为接收所述第一信号和所述第一控制信令中至少之一的通信节点。
  42. 根据权利要求36所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一传输参数的类型为所述第一控制信令中包括的除TCI传输参数类型之外的至少一个传输参数类型；或者，
    所述第一传输参数类型为TCI传输参数。
  43. 根据权利要求36所述的方法，其中，所述第一传输参数满足以下至少之一：
    所述第一传输参数为所述第一信号的传输参数；
    所述第一传输参数为第二信号的传输参数。
  44. 根据权利要求43所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一信号或者所述第二信号包括以下信号至少之一：解调参考信号、测量参考信号、控制信道信号、以及数据信道信号；
    所述第一控制信令为物理层控制信令。
  45. 根据权利要求43所述的方法，其中，所述第一信息还包括以下信息至少之一：
    发送的第二控制信令中包括的信息；所述第一控制信令所在的控制资源集合CORESET对应的传输配置指示TCI-PresentInDCI是否使能信息；所述第一信号或者所述第二信号所在的载频与预定阈值G之间的关系；第一通信节点反馈的支持的频率范围能力；所述预设阈值K是否为0；第一通信节点需要检测的CORESET中是否至少存在一个配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与第一通信节点需要检测专有搜索空间关联的CORESET集合中是否至少存在一个配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与所述第一信号或者所述第二信号距离最近的时间 单元中具有最低控制资源集合标识CORESET ID的CORESET是否配置了空间接收参数；与所述第一信号或者第二信号距离最近的时域符号中具有最低CORESET ID的CORESET是否配置了空间接收参数；与所述第一信号或者所述第二信号关联的TCI状态池中是否至少存在一个TCI状态，其中，所述TCI状态中与参考信号集合对应的QCL参数中包括空间接收参数；与所述第一信号或者所述第二信号关联的激活TCI状态池中，是否至少存在一个TCI状态，所述TCI状态中与所述参考信号集合对应的QCL参数中包括空间接收参数；
    其中，所述第一通信节点为接收所述第一信号和第二信号中至少之一的通信节点。
  46. 根据权利要求36所述的方法，其中，
    在所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系时，所述第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的所述第一传输参数的类型为第一类型传输参数；
    在所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第二关系时，所述第二控制信令中预定指示域所通知的所述第一传输参数的类型为第二类型传输参数。
  47. 根据权利要求37、39或46所述的方法，其中，
    在所述第一控制信令和所述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔小于所述预定阈值K时，所述关系为所述第一关系，在所述控制信令和所述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值K时，所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为所述第二关系；或者，
    在所述控制信令和所述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔小于或者等于所述预定阈值K时，所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为所述第一关系，在所述控制信令和所述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔大于所述预定阈值K时，所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为所述第二关系；或者，
    在所述控制信令和所述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值K时，所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系，在所述控制信令和所述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔小于所述预定阈值K时，所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为所述第二关系。
  48. 一种控制信令的接收方法，包括：
    根据第一信息确定第二信息；
    根据所述第二信息接收第一控制信令；
    其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和所述第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；所述第一信息包括：所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数。
  49. 根据权利要求48所述的方法，其中，
    在所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系时，所述N的取值包括N1；
    在所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第二关系时，所述N的取值包括N2；
    其中，N1、N2为整数。
  50. 根据权利要求49所述的方法，其中，所述N1和所述N2之间的关系满足以下至少之一：
    所述N1大于所述N2；
    所述N1与所述N2的差值小于或者等于传输配置指示TCI域所占的比特数；
    所述N1与所述N2的差值小于或者等于通知第二传输参数信息所需要的比特数。
  51. 根据权利要求48所述的方法，其中，
    在所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系时，所述对应映射表格为第一对应映射表格；
    在所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第二关系时，所述对应映射表格为第二对应映射表格。
  52. 根据权利要求51所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一对应映射表格、所述第二对应映射表格、传输参数取值集合一以及传输参数取值集合二中的任一项通过以下方式至少之一确定：
    方式一、接收的信令信息所包括的内容；
    方式二、与发送端预先约定的规则；
    其中，所述传输参数取值集合一对应所述第一对应映射表格中包括的所述第一传输参数的取值集合，所述传输参数取值集合二对应所述第二对应映射表格中包括的所述第一传输参数的取值集合；其中所述发送端为发送所述第一控制信令的通信节点。
  53. 根据权利要求51所述的方法，其中，所述方法满足以下之一：
    在所述第一传输参数的类型为TCI时，所述第一对应映射表格中每个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号DL-RS构成的DL-RS集合中只包括一个DL-RS；
    在所述第一传输参数类型为TCI时，所述第一对应映射表格中每个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号DL-RS构成的DL-RS集合中DL-RS两两之间关于空间接收参数满足准共址QCL关系；
    在所述第一传输参数类型为TCI时，所述第一对应映射表格中每个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号DL-RS构成的DL-RS集合中的DL-RS能被第一通信节点同时接收；
    在所述第一传输参数类型为TCI时，所述第一对应映射表格中每个状态中关联空间接收参数的下行链路参考信号DL-RS构成的DL-RS集合为空集；
    其中，所述第一通信节点为接收所述第一信号和所述第一控制信令中至少之一的通信节点。
  54. 根据权利要求48所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一传输参数的类型为所述第一控制信令中包括的除TCI传输参数类型之外的至少一个传输参数类型；或者，
    所述第一传输参数类型为TCI传输参数。
  55. 根据权利要求48所述的方法，其中，所述第一传输参数满足以下至少之一：
    所述第一传输参数为所述第一信号的传输参数；
    所述第一传输参数为第二信号的传输参数。
  56. 根据权利要求55所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一信号或者所述第二信号包括以下信号至少之一：解调参考信号、测量参考信号、控制信道信号、以及数据信道信号；
    所述第一控制信令为物理层控制信令。
  57. 根据权利要求55所述的方法，其中，所述第一信息还包括以下信息至 少之一：
    接收的第二控制信令中包括的信息；所述第一控制信令所在的控制资源集合CORESET对应的传输配置指示TCI-PresentInDCI是否使能信息；所述第一信号或者所述第二信号所在的载频与预定阈值G之间的关系；第一通信节点反馈的支持的频率范围能力；所述预设阈值K是否为0；第一通信节点需要检测的CORESET中是否至少存在一个配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与第一通信节点需要检测专有搜索空间关联的CORESET集合中是否至少存在一个配置了空间接收参数的CORESET；与所述第一信号或者所述第二信号距离最近的时间单元中具有最低控制资源集合标识CORESET ID的CORESET是否配置了空间接收参数；与所述第一信号或者第二信号距离最近的时域符号中具有最低CORESET ID的CORESET是否配置了空间接收参数；与所述第一信号或者所述第二信号关联的TCI状态池中是否至少存在一个TCI状态，其中，所述TCI状态中与参考信号集合对应的QCL参数中包括空间接收参数；与所述第一信号或者所述第二信号关联的激活TCI状态池中，是否至少存在一个TCI状态，所述TCI状态中与所述参考信号集合对应的QCL参数中包括空间接收参数；
    其中，所述第一通信节点为接收以下至少之一的通信节点：所述第一信号、第二信号，以及所述第一控制信令。
  58. 根据权利要求48所述的方法，其中，
    在所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系时，所述第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的所述第一传输参数的类型为第一类型传输参数；
    在所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第二关系时，所述第二控制信令中预定指示域所通知的所述第一传输参数的类型为第二类型传输参数。
  59. 根据权利要求49、51或58所述的方法，其中，
    在所述第一控制信令和所述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔小于所述预定阈值K时，所述关系为所述第一关系，在所述控制信令和所述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值K时，所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为所述第二关系；或者，
    在所述控制信令和所述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔小于或者等于所述预定阈值K时，所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K 之间的关系为所述第一关系，在所述控制信令和所述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔大于所述预定阈值K时，所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为所述第二关系；或者，
    在所述控制信令和所述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔大于或者等于所述预定阈值K时，所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为第一关系，在所述控制信令和所述第一信号之间的传输时间间隔小于所述预定阈值K时，所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系为所述第二关系。
  60. 一种控制信令的发送装置，应用于第一通信节点，包括：
    第一确定模块，设置为根据第一信息确定第二信息；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和所述第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；所述第一信息包括：所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数；
    第一发送模块，设置为发送所述第一控制信令。
  61. 一种信息的确定装置，应用于第一通信节点，包括：
    第一确定模块，设置为根据第一信息确定第二信息；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一信号的准共址QCL参数；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的发送方式；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的接收方式；其中，所述第一信息包括以下信息至少之一：特定控制资源集合CORESET之后预定时间窗中是否存在所述第二信号，所述第一信号和特定CORESET之间的间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，所述第二信号和特定CORESET之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，所述第一信号和第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，所述第二信号和第二控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，第一信号对应的第一空间接收参数和第二信号对应的第二空间接收参数之间的关系，其中X1、X2为实数。
  62. 一种控制信令的接收装置，应用于第二通信节点，包括：
    第一确定模块，设置为根据第一信息确定第二信息；
    接收模块，设置为根据所述第二信息接收第一控制信令；
    其中，所述第二信息为根据第一信息确定的信息；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和所述第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；所述第一信息包括：所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数。
  63. 一种存储介质，所述存储介质中存储有计算机程序，其中，所述计算机程序被设置为运行时执行所述权利要求1至28、权利要求29至35、权利要求36至47以及权利要求48至59任一项中所述的方法。
  64. 一种电子装置，包括存储器和处理器，所述存储器中存储有计算机程序，所述处理器被设置为运行所述计算机程序以执行所述权利要求1至28、权利要求29至35、权利要求36至47以及权利要求48至59任一项中所述的方法。
  65. 一种基站，包括：
    处理器以及存储有所述处理器可执行指令的存储器，当所述指令被处理器执行时，执行如下操作：根据第一信息确定第二信息；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和所述第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；所述第一信息包括：所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数；
    发送所述第一控制信令。
  66. 一种基站，包括：
    处理器以及存储有所述处理器可执行指令的存储器，当所述指令被处理器执行时，执行如下操作：根据第一信息确定第二信息；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一信号的准共址QCL参数；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的发送方式；第二信号所在的时域位置上第一信号的接收方式；其中，所述第一信息包括以下信息至少之一：特定控制资源集合CORESET之后预定时间窗中是否存在所述第二信号，所述第一信号和特定CORESET之间的间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，所述第二信号和特定CORESET之间的时间间隔与 预定阈值X2之间的关系，所述第一信号和第一控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X1之间的关系，所述第二信号和第二控制信令之间的时间间隔与预定阈值X2之间的关系，第一信号对应的第一空间接收参数和第二信号对应的第二空间接收参数之间的关系，其中X1、X2为实数。
  67. 一种终端，包括：
    处理器以及存储有所述处理器可执行指令的存储器，当所述指令被处理器执行时，执行如下操作：根据第一信息确定第二信息；根据所述第二信息接收第一控制信令；其中，所述第二信息包括以下至少之一：第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特数N、第一控制信令中第一传输参数所参照的索引值和所述第一传输参数的取值之间的对应映射表格、第一控制信令中预定指示域所通知的第一传输参数的类型、第一控制信令中通知第一传输参数所使用的比特的位置信息；所述第一信息包括：所述第一控制信令和第一信号之间的传输时间间隔与预定阈值K之间的关系，N、K为非负整数。
PCT/CN2019/076207 2018-02-26 2019-02-26 控制信令的发送、控制信令的接收以及信息的确定方法及装置 WO2019161807A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP19757789.3A EP3761549A4 (en) 2018-02-26 2019-02-26 METHODS AND DEVICES FOR SENDING AND RECEIVING CONTROL SIGNALING AND METHODS FOR DETERMINING INFORMATION
KR1020207027866A KR20200125678A (ko) 2018-02-26 2019-02-26 제어 시그널링을 전송하고 수신하기 위한 방법들 및 장치들, 및 정보를 결정하기 위한 방법
CA3092288A CA3092288A1 (en) 2018-02-26 2019-02-26 Methods and apparatuses for transmitting and receiving control signaling, and method for determining information
JP2020544797A JP7374913B2 (ja) 2018-02-26 2019-02-26 制御シグナリングを送受信するための方法および装置、ならびに情報を決定するための方法
EP23194567.6A EP4277176A3 (en) 2018-02-26 2019-02-26 Methods and apparatuses for transmitting and receiving control signaling, and method for determining information
US17/002,474 US11564218B2 (en) 2018-02-26 2020-08-25 Methods and apparatuses for transmitting and receiving control signaling, and method for determining information
US18/147,039 US12010707B2 (en) 2018-02-26 2022-12-28 Methods and apparatuses for transmitting and receiving control signaling, and method for determining information
JP2023183408A JP2024010104A (ja) 2018-02-26 2023-10-25 制御シグナリングを送受信するための方法および装置、ならびに情報を決定するための方法

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201810160248.2 2018-02-26
CN201810160248.2A CN108199819A (zh) 2018-02-26 2018-02-26 控制信令的发送、接收以及信息的确定方法及装置

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/002,474 Continuation US11564218B2 (en) 2018-02-26 2020-08-25 Methods and apparatuses for transmitting and receiving control signaling, and method for determining information

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019161807A1 true WO2019161807A1 (zh) 2019-08-29

Family

ID=62593804

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/076207 WO2019161807A1 (zh) 2018-02-26 2019-02-26 控制信令的发送、控制信令的接收以及信息的确定方法及装置

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (1) US11564218B2 (zh)
EP (2) EP4277176A3 (zh)
JP (2) JP7374913B2 (zh)
KR (1) KR20200125678A (zh)
CN (2) CN114598437A (zh)
CA (2) CA3092288A1 (zh)
WO (1) WO2019161807A1 (zh)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20210068117A1 (en) * 2019-04-02 2021-03-04 Shanghai Langbo Communication Technology Company Limited Method and device in nodes used for wireless communication
JP2021520128A (ja) * 2018-04-04 2021-08-12 維沃移動通信有限公司Ｖｉｖｏ Ｍｏｂｉｌｅ Ｃｏｍｍｕｎｉｃａｔｉｏｎ Ｃｏ．， Ｌｔｄ． チャネルと信号の伝送方法及び通信機器
CN113938170A (zh) * 2020-07-13 2022-01-14 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 一种被用于无线通信的用户设备、基站中的方法和装置
JP7451725B2 (ja) 2020-01-17 2024-03-18 中興通訊股▲ふん▼有限公司 パラメータ情報確定方法、通信ノードおよび記憶媒体

Families Citing this family (102)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114598437A (zh) 2018-02-26 2022-06-07 中兴通讯股份有限公司 控制信令的发送、接收以及信息的确定方法及装置
US10979273B2 (en) * 2018-03-23 2021-04-13 Qualcomm Incorporated Quasi co-location assumption during bandwidth part switching
KR102179624B1 (ko) 2018-03-26 2020-11-18 아서스테크 컴퓨터 인코포레이션 무선 통신 시스템에서의 크로스 캐리어 스케줄링을 고려한 다운링크 데이터 버퍼링을 위한 방법 및 장치
WO2019191929A1 (zh) * 2018-04-04 2019-10-10 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 传输上行控制信息的方法、终端设备和网络设备
EP3777323A4 (en) * 2018-04-05 2022-01-26 Nokia Technologies Oy ROOM FILTER CONFIGURATION OF A USER EQUIPMENT RECEIVER DURING RECOVERY FROM A SECONDARY CELL BEAM FAILURE
JP6756001B2 (ja) * 2018-05-04 2020-09-16 華碩電腦股▲ふん▼有限公司 無線通信システムにおけるアクティブ下りリンク（ｄｌ）帯域幅部分（ｂｗｐ）変更を考慮する下りリンク制御情報（ｄｃｉ）コンテンツ処理のための方法および装置
EP3817490A4 (en) * 2018-06-29 2022-01-19 Ntt Docomo, Inc. USER TERMINAL
WO2020003522A1 (ja) * 2018-06-29 2020-01-02 株式会社Ｎｔｔドコモ ユーザ端末
CN110677225B (zh) * 2018-07-02 2021-01-15 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 一种上报及接收参考信号的方法和设备
US10659109B2 (en) * 2018-07-02 2020-05-19 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus for expanding quasi-colocation (QCL) signaling to cover varied scenarios
US11095415B2 (en) * 2018-07-02 2021-08-17 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Enhancements to reception reliability for data and control information
CN116546629A (zh) * 2018-07-03 2023-08-04 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 一种被用于无线通信的用户设备、基站中的方法和装置
US10701679B2 (en) 2018-07-05 2020-06-30 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Method and system for enhancing data channel reliability using multiple transmit receive points
CN114916004A (zh) * 2018-07-25 2022-08-16 北京小米移动软件有限公司 传输配置方法及装置
CN109076593B (zh) * 2018-07-25 2022-05-13 北京小米移动软件有限公司 传输配置方法及装置
CN113365359B (zh) * 2018-07-27 2023-09-12 北京小米移动软件有限公司 传输配置指示的配置方法及装置
ES2894645T3 (es) * 2018-07-31 2022-02-15 Lg Electronics Inc Método para monitorizar una señal de control por un terminal en un sistema de comunicación inalámbrica, y terminal que utiliza el mismo método
WO2020024224A1 (en) * 2018-08-02 2020-02-06 Zte Corporation Systems and methods for channel property assumption determination
WO2020024297A1 (en) * 2018-08-03 2020-02-06 Nec Corporation Multi-trp communication
CN111010890B (zh) * 2018-08-06 2022-07-08 Lg电子株式会社 在无线通信系统的coreset中接收信号的方法和使用该方法的设备
CN110809321B (zh) * 2018-08-06 2022-04-29 成都华为技术有限公司 接收和发送信号的方法以及通信装置
CN112544048A (zh) * 2018-08-07 2021-03-23 苹果公司 用于可靠通信的物理下行链路共享信道（pdsch）重复传输
US10917212B2 (en) * 2018-08-10 2021-02-09 Mediatek Inc. Default QCL assumption for PDSCH reception
CN110830203B (zh) * 2018-08-10 2022-08-30 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 一种准共址信息指示的方法和设备
CN110839286B (zh) * 2018-08-16 2022-09-06 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 数据传输方法、装置、基站、终端及计算机可读存储介质
CN110839290B (zh) * 2018-08-17 2022-04-22 成都华为技术有限公司 信号传输的方法和通信装置
KR20200020567A (ko) * 2018-08-17 2020-02-26 삼성전자주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서의 기준 신호 빔 정보 설정 및 지시 방법 및 장치
AU2018439558A1 (en) * 2018-08-30 2021-03-04 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Method and device for transmitting uplink signal
US11006403B2 (en) * 2018-09-04 2021-05-11 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for use in determining a transmission configuration state
US20220061080A1 (en) * 2018-09-10 2022-02-24 Ntt Docomo, Inc. User terminal and radio communication method
EP3855823A4 (en) * 2018-09-21 2022-04-27 Ntt Docomo, Inc. USER TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD
KR102586001B1 (ko) 2018-09-21 2023-10-10 삼성전자주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 우선 순위를 고려한 물리계층 채널 송수신 방법 및 장치
EP3860284A4 (en) * 2018-09-28 2022-04-27 Ntt Docomo, Inc. USER DEVICE
CN110972326B (zh) * 2018-09-28 2022-05-31 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种下行控制信道传输方法、终端和网络侧设备
CN110535592B (zh) * 2018-09-28 2023-02-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种信息传输的方法及相关设备
CN110971367A (zh) * 2018-09-28 2020-04-07 中兴通讯股份有限公司 信息的确定方法、信号的接收方法及装置
CN110972320B (zh) * 2018-09-30 2022-01-25 维沃移动通信有限公司 接收方法、发送方法、终端及网络侧设备
US11184902B2 (en) 2018-10-08 2021-11-23 Qualcomm Incorporated Semi-static transmission configuration indicator configuration
US11291006B2 (en) * 2018-10-11 2022-03-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for configuring active spatial relations in wireless communications
CN112913177B (zh) * 2018-10-19 2023-11-14 Lg电子株式会社 在无线通信系统中发送和接收多个物理下行链路共享信道的方法及用于其的装置
US20210385847A1 (en) * 2018-10-19 2021-12-09 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for transmitting and receiving plurality of physical downlink shared channels in wireless communication system, and device for same
CN111106907B (zh) * 2018-10-26 2021-11-30 维沃移动通信有限公司 传输配置指示tci状态的指示方法及终端
CN111106906B (zh) * 2018-10-26 2021-06-29 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 控制信道发送、接收方法、网络设备及终端
JP7193550B2 (ja) * 2018-10-31 2022-12-20 株式会社Ｎｔｔドコモ 端末、無線通信方法及びシステム
CN111130669B (zh) * 2018-11-01 2020-12-08 北京紫光展锐通信技术有限公司 传输接收点信息获取方法及用户终端、可读存储介质
WO2020090097A1 (ja) * 2018-11-01 2020-05-07 株式会社Ｎｔｔドコモ ユーザ装置及び基地局装置
CN111132354B (zh) * 2018-11-01 2022-10-25 展讯通信（上海）有限公司 Tci的自动修改方法及装置、存储介质、终端
EP3874667A4 (en) 2018-11-02 2022-08-17 FG Innovation Company Limited METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLE TRANSMIT/RECEIVE POINT (TRP) OPERATIONS
CN110535597B (zh) * 2018-11-02 2022-06-24 中兴通讯股份有限公司 准共址参考信号确定方法、装置、网络设备和存储介质
CN111106913B (zh) * 2018-11-02 2021-04-27 维沃移动通信有限公司 无线通信的方法和设备
CN111147211B (zh) * 2018-11-02 2022-04-05 华为技术有限公司 一种信息传输方法、装置和设备
EP3874831B1 (en) * 2018-11-02 2023-09-27 Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Method and apparatus for saving user equipment power with mimo operation
CN111148242B (zh) * 2018-11-05 2022-07-29 华为技术有限公司 信息传输方法及装置
US11251931B2 (en) * 2018-11-07 2022-02-15 Qualcomm Incorporated Active transmission configuration indication states
US11172513B2 (en) * 2018-11-12 2021-11-09 Qualcomm Incorporated Configuring transmission configuration indication states on an initial control resource set
CN115296779A (zh) * 2018-11-12 2022-11-04 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种确定准共址参考信号的方法和装置
US11172457B2 (en) 2018-11-14 2021-11-09 Qualcomm Incorporated Transmission configuration indication state ordering for an initial control resource set
CN111106915B (zh) * 2018-11-16 2021-11-12 维沃移动通信有限公司 无线通信的方法和设备
US11419133B2 (en) * 2018-11-30 2022-08-16 Qualcomm Incorporated Flexible control information for wireless communications
CN111278113B (zh) * 2018-12-05 2022-10-04 成都华为技术有限公司 一种数据传输方法和设备
US20220069957A1 (en) * 2018-12-21 2022-03-03 Lg Electronics Inc. Operating method of terminal and base station in wireless communication system, and device for supporting same
CN111277378B (zh) 2018-12-29 2021-08-17 维沃移动通信有限公司 信息的接收方法、发送方法、终端及网络侧设备
WO2020034561A1 (en) * 2019-01-04 2020-02-20 Zte Corporation Rate matching resource mapping in wireless communications
WO2020142899A1 (zh) * 2019-01-08 2020-07-16 北京小米移动软件有限公司 下行数据接收方法、发送方法、装置和储存介质
EP4106257A1 (en) 2019-01-09 2022-12-21 Comcast Cable Communications LLC Methods, devices, and apparatuses for beam management
AR117806A1 (es) * 2019-01-10 2021-08-25 Ericsson Telefon Ab L M Grupos de multiplexación por división de código (cdm) para transmisión de fuentes múltiples
CN117544287A (zh) * 2019-01-10 2024-02-09 中兴通讯股份有限公司 信息元素的传输方法、装置及存储介质
CN114050893A (zh) * 2019-01-10 2022-02-15 成都华为技术有限公司 数据传输方法及装置
CN110535545A (zh) * 2019-01-11 2019-12-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种信息确定方法和装置、信息元素的处理方法和装置
EP3905574A4 (en) * 2019-01-11 2022-02-16 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS
CN110535570B (zh) * 2019-01-18 2023-08-11 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种传输信息的方法和装置
CN111277380B (zh) * 2019-01-25 2022-02-25 维沃移动通信有限公司 重复传输方法、终端及网络侧设备
WO2020166987A1 (ko) * 2019-02-15 2020-08-20 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 코드워드를 수신하는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치
CN113424481B (zh) * 2019-02-15 2023-10-27 Lg电子株式会社 在无线通信系统中发送和接收数据的方法及其设备
EP3930274A4 (en) * 2019-02-22 2022-11-02 Ntt Docomo, Inc. USER TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD
WO2020168575A1 (zh) * 2019-02-22 2020-08-27 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 无线通信方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2020191740A1 (zh) * 2019-03-28 2020-10-01 富士通株式会社 信号接收或发送方法、装置和系统
CN113661744B (zh) * 2019-03-29 2023-12-26 Lg电子株式会社 在无线通信系统中确定传输块大小并发送和接收数据的方法及其装置
CN114244484A (zh) * 2019-03-29 2022-03-25 华为技术有限公司 通信处理方法和装置
US11197185B2 (en) * 2019-04-01 2021-12-07 Mediatek Inc. NR CSI-RS based beam failure detection/radio link monitoring in FR2
CN114051705B (zh) * 2019-04-08 2024-04-26 汉尼拔Ip有限责任公司 多面板传输中推导准共位假设的方法及相关装置
CN111867094B (zh) * 2019-04-30 2024-03-05 华为技术有限公司 数据接收和发送方法及装置
CN113748636A (zh) * 2019-05-02 2021-12-03 苹果公司 改善5g nr中的dci触发的波束更新的稳健性的方法
CN111934830B (zh) * 2019-05-13 2022-12-27 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及设备
CN111954302B (zh) * 2019-05-16 2023-02-03 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种信息获取方法及装置
EP3972175B1 (en) * 2019-07-25 2023-08-30 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Method used for transmitting data, and terminal device
US11284385B2 (en) * 2019-08-13 2022-03-22 Acer Incorporated Device and method for handling a reception
CN110475361B (zh) * 2019-08-16 2022-06-10 展讯通信（上海）有限公司 接入资源的确定方法及装置、存储介质、终端
CN113711661B (zh) * 2019-09-30 2023-06-27 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 数据传输方法、设备及介质
WO2021068261A1 (zh) * 2019-10-12 2021-04-15 华为技术有限公司 频域传输资源配置的方法以及装置
CN111314035B (zh) * 2020-01-20 2022-09-13 北京紫光展锐通信技术有限公司 Pdcch的监控方法、装置、用户设备及存储介质
WO2021163936A1 (zh) * 2020-02-19 2021-08-26 北京小米移动软件有限公司 通信处理方法、装置及计算机存储介质
CN111867109A (zh) * 2020-04-15 2020-10-30 中兴通讯股份有限公司 空间参数确定方法及装置
EP4133652A4 (en) * 2020-05-15 2024-01-03 Apple Inc QUASI-LOCALIZED FRAME FOR BEAM RECEPTION IN A SINGLE FREQUENCY NETWORK
US11683815B2 (en) * 2020-05-15 2023-06-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Piggyback downlink control information (DCI) scheduling limit
CN117336780A (zh) * 2020-06-02 2024-01-02 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 一种被用于无线通信的节点中的方法和装置
CN115943701A (zh) * 2020-07-31 2023-04-07 联想(北京)有限公司 用于物理下行链路控制信道中的下行链路传输的方法及设备
EP4214851A1 (en) * 2020-12-15 2023-07-26 Ofinno Technologies, LLC Default common beam mechanism for multiple beam scenario
CN114727393A (zh) * 2021-01-05 2022-07-08 展讯半导体(南京)有限公司 传输配置指示状态的确定方法及装置
WO2022147755A1 (en) * 2021-01-08 2022-07-14 Zte Corporation Unified transmission configuration indicators in multiple transmission reception point environments
CN117063410A (zh) * 2021-04-02 2023-11-14 中兴通讯股份有限公司 将统一的传输配置指示（tci）状态应用于目标信号的方法和系统
WO2024050816A1 (zh) * 2022-09-09 2024-03-14 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Tci状态确定方法、装置、设备及存储介质

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106559879A (zh) * 2015-09-25 2017-04-05 中兴通讯股份有限公司 信息发送及确定、关系确定的方法及装置
CN107342852A (zh) * 2016-04-29 2017-11-10 中兴通讯股份有限公司 信令发送、接收方法及装置、网络侧设备、终端
CN107733611A (zh) * 2016-08-12 2018-02-23 中兴通讯股份有限公司 准共位置信息的处理方法及装置
CN108199819A (zh) * 2018-02-26 2018-06-22 中兴通讯股份有限公司 控制信令的发送、接收以及信息的确定方法及装置

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2017063779A1 (en) * 2015-10-16 2017-04-20 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Apparatus and method for discovery reference signal aligned scheduling
EP4210269A1 (en) * 2017-01-06 2023-07-12 LG Electronics Inc. Method for transmitting reference signal in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
WO2019099659A1 (en) * 2017-11-15 2019-05-23 Idac Holdings, Inc. Beam management in a wireless network
CN113055147A (zh) * 2018-02-11 2021-06-29 华为技术有限公司 准共址信息的确定方法、装置及设备
WO2019165224A1 (en) * 2018-02-23 2019-08-29 Idac Holdings, Inc. System and method for bandwidth part operation

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106559879A (zh) * 2015-09-25 2017-04-05 中兴通讯股份有限公司 信息发送及确定、关系确定的方法及装置
CN107342852A (zh) * 2016-04-29 2017-11-10 中兴通讯股份有限公司 信令发送、接收方法及装置、网络侧设备、终端
CN107733611A (zh) * 2016-08-12 2018-02-23 中兴通讯股份有限公司 准共位置信息的处理方法及装置
CN108199819A (zh) * 2018-02-26 2018-06-22 中兴通讯股份有限公司 控制信令的发送、接收以及信息的确定方法及装置

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ZTE ET AL.: "R1-1719538, Details and evaluation results on beam indication", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING #91, 18 November 2017 (2017-11-18), XP051369352 *

Cited By (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2021520128A (ja) * 2018-04-04 2021-08-12 維沃移動通信有限公司Ｖｉｖｏ Ｍｏｂｉｌｅ Ｃｏｍｍｕｎｉｃａｔｉｏｎ Ｃｏ．， Ｌｔｄ． チャネルと信号の伝送方法及び通信機器
US11497032B2 (en) 2018-04-04 2022-11-08 Vivo Mobile Communication Co., Ltd. Channel and signal transmission method and communication device
JP7240412B2 (ja) 2018-04-04 2023-03-15 維沃移動通信有限公司 チャネルと信号の伝送方法及び通信機器
US11968705B2 (en) 2018-04-04 2024-04-23 Vivo Mobile Communication Co., Ltd. Channel and signal transmission method and communication device
US20210068117A1 (en) * 2019-04-02 2021-03-04 Shanghai Langbo Communication Technology Company Limited Method and device in nodes used for wireless communication
US11743927B2 (en) * 2019-04-02 2023-08-29 Shanghai Langbo Communication Technology Company Limited Method and device in nodes used for wireless communication
JP7451725B2 (ja) 2020-01-17 2024-03-18 中興通訊股▲ふん▼有限公司 パラメータ情報確定方法、通信ノードおよび記憶媒体
CN113938170A (zh) * 2020-07-13 2022-01-14 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 一种被用于无线通信的用户设备、基站中的方法和装置
CN113938170B (zh) * 2020-07-13 2024-04-19 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 一种被用于无线通信的用户设备、基站中的方法和装置

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR20200125678A (ko) 2020-11-04
EP4277176A3 (en) 2024-01-10
EP3761549A1 (en) 2021-01-06
US11564218B2 (en) 2023-01-24
JP7374913B2 (ja) 2023-11-07
JP2021515473A (ja) 2021-06-17
CA3092288A1 (en) 2019-08-29
EP3761549A4 (en) 2021-04-07
JP2024010104A (ja) 2024-01-23
CN108199819A (zh) 2018-06-22
CA3238859A1 (en) 2019-08-29
EP4277176A2 (en) 2023-11-15
US20230199790A1 (en) 2023-06-22
US20210084623A1 (en) 2021-03-18
CN114598437A (zh) 2022-06-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2019161807A1 (zh) 控制信令的发送、控制信令的接收以及信息的确定方法及装置
US11647404B2 (en) Method and apparatus for indicating beam failure recovery operation of terminal in wireless communication system
US11496917B2 (en) Method and apparatus for measuring and reporting channel state in wireless communication system
TWI679905B (zh) 換手方法與裝置
US20210028823A1 (en) Method for measurement and report of channel state information for network cooperative communication
CN111148242B (zh) 信息传输方法及装置
US11991737B2 (en) Adjusting a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) format in a wireless communication network
CN117692119A (zh) 半持续csi报告的激活和去激活
US11303408B2 (en) Reference signal transmission and reception method and apparatus for beam management
CN113711659B (zh) 带宽部分特定的调度配置
WO2022042689A1 (zh) 传输方法、装置、通信设备及终端
US20210337560A1 (en) Channel Measurement Method and Apparatus
US20200119996A1 (en) Message sending method and apparatus
US20230216615A1 (en) Single tb transmission over multiple slots
CN116058047A (zh) 用户设备、调度节点、用户设备的方法和调度节点的方法
TW202126085A (zh) 使用者設備、排程節點、用於使用者設備之方法及用於排程節點之方法
US20230261723A1 (en) Apparatus, Method, and Computer Program
JP2024519220A (ja) ユーザ機器、スケジューリングノード、ユーザ機器のための方法、スケジューリングノードのための方法および集積回路
CN115868131A (zh) 用户设备、调度节点、用于用户设备的方法和用于调度节点的方法
US12010707B2 (en) Methods and apparatuses for transmitting and receiving control signaling, and method for determining information
WO2019001523A1 (zh) 控制信息传输方法和设备
RU2802829C1 (ru) Восстановление после сбоя луча вторичной соты на основе группы
WO2022237620A1 (zh) Csi测量资源的处理方法及装置、终端及可读存储介质
WO2021253952A1 (zh) 资源更新方法及装置
KR20230104873A (ko) 하이브리드 자동 반복 요청 확인응답 프로시저를 사용한 빔 표시 관련 다운링크 제어 정보 재전송을 위한 시스템 및 방법

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19757789

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020544797

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 3092288

Country of ref document: CA

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20207027866

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2019757789

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20200928